MDM6000

User Manual
MDM6000 Satellite Modem

R3.1
V1.0
Table of Contents MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Table of Contents

1 Copyright ............................................................................................................. 1

2 EU Compliancy Statements ............................................................................... 2

2.1 Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1995/5/EC ................................. 2
2.2 EMC Information .......................................................................................................................................... 3
2.3 Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS) (Directive 2011/65/EU) ....................................... 3
2.4 Registration, Evaluation and Authorization of Chemicals (REACH) ............................................................ 4
2.5 WEEE – Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive ................................................................... 5

3 Safety Regulations ............................................................................................. 6

3.1 Environmental ............................................................................................................................................. 8
3.2 Rack Mounting Instructions ......................................................................................................................... 8
3.3 Earth Ground ............................................................................................................................................... 9

4 Options .............................................................................................................. 10

5 Feedback ........................................................................................................... 12

6 About this Manual ............................................................................................ 13

6.1 Version History and Applicability ............................................................................................................... 13
6.2 Cautions and Symbols .............................................................................................................................. 13
6.3 Related Documentation ............................................................................................................................. 14

7 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 15
7.1 Efficiency at the Core ................................................................................................................................ 15
7.2 Optimal Availability .................................................................................................................................... 15
7.3 Flexibility and Scalability Matching Market Business Models ................................................................... 16

8 Physical Description ......................................................................................... 17

8.1 Front Panel Description ............................................................................................................................. 17
8.1.1 Display ................................................................................................................................................. 17
8.1.2 Soft Buttons and Navigation Buttons ................................................................................................... 18
8.1.3 Front Panel Management Interface ...................................................................................................... 18
8.1.4 USB Interface ....................................................................................................................................... 19
8.1.5 LED Status Indicators .......................................................................................................................... 20
8.2 Back Panel Description .............................................................................................................................. 21
8.2.1 Power Connector ................................................................................................................................. 23

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted
Table of Contents MDM6000 Satellite Modem

8.2.2 Earth Ground ....................................................................................................................................... 24

8.2.3 Craft Interface ...................................................................................................................................... 25
8.2.4 Alarm Interface ..................................................................................................................................... 26

9 Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 28

9.1 Device Management ................................................................................................................................. 29
9.2 Data Input and Output Interfaces ............................................................................................................... 29
9.3 BBF over IP In ........................................................................................................................................... 30
9.4 Encapsulation ............................................................................................................................................ 31
9.5 Modulator ................................................................................................................................................... 33
9.5.1 PRBS Generator .................................................................................................................................. 33
9.5.2 L-band TX or IF-band TX Interfaces .................................................................................................... 33
9.6 Demodulator .............................................................................................................................................. 34
9.6.1 L-band RX A / L-band RX B Input Interfaces ....................................................................................... 34
9.7 BBF over IP Out ........................................................................................................................................ 35
9.8 Decapsulation ........................................................................................................................................... 36

10 Getting Started ................................................................................................ 37

10.1 Set the Management IP Address ............................................................................................................. 37
10.2 Set Date and Time ................................................................................................................................... 38
10.3 Configure and Save ................................................................................................................................. 39

11 Quick Configuration Templates .................................................................... 40

11.1 Layer 2 Point to Point .............................................................................................................................. 41
11.2 Layer 2 Point to Point ACM Enabled ....................................................................................................... 42
11.3 Layer 2 Point to Point ACM Enabled and In-Band Management ............................................................ 43
11.4 Layer 3 Point to Point .............................................................................................................................. 44
11.5 Layer 3 Point to Point ACM Enabled ....................................................................................................... 45

12 How to Manage the Device ............................................................................ 46

12.1 Management Model / Menu Tree ............................................................................................................ 46
12.2 Management Ethernet Interfaces ............................................................................................................ 48
12.3 Management IP Connectivity ................................................................................................................... 49
12.4 Ethernet Link Redundancy ...................................................................................................................... 50
12.5 Graphical User Interface .......................................................................................................................... 52
12.5.1 Opening the GUI ................................................................................................................................ 52
12.5.2 User Profiles ....................................................................................................................................... 53
12.5.2.1 Guest Profile ............................................................................................................................... 54
12.5.2.2 Operator Profile ........................................................................................................................... 54
12.5.2.3 Expert Profile ............................................................................................................................... 54

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted
Table of Contents MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5.3 Switch User Profile ............................................................................................................................. 55

12.5.4 Change a Password ........................................................................................................................... 56
12.5.5 GUI Pane Description ......................................................................................................................... 57
12.5.6 Overview Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 59
12.5.7 Detailed View of a Functional Block ................................................................................................... 62
12.5.8 Tree View ........................................................................................................................................... 63
12.5.9 Alarms Pane ....................................................................................................................................... 64
12.5.10 Status Bar ........................................................................................................................................ 65
12.5.11 Colors Used in the GUI ..................................................................................................................... 66
12.5.12 Parameters in the GUI ..................................................................................................................... 68
12.5.13 Update or Configure Parameters in a Table ..................................................................................... 70
12.5.14 Invalid Values ................................................................................................................................... 71
12.6 The Front Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 72
12.6.1 Navigating Through the Display ......................................................................................................... 72
12.6.2 Front Panel Buttons Description ......................................................................................................... 73
12.6.3 Root Menu Pane ................................................................................................................................ 74
12.6.4 Tree Menu Pane ................................................................................................................................ 75
12.6.5 Using the USB Port ............................................................................................................................ 76
12.6.6 Example: Change the Access Level .................................................................................................. 77
12.6.7 Example: Set the Input Frequency ..................................................................................................... 78
12.6.8 Example: Set the Output Frequency .................................................................................................. 78
12.6.9 Example: Check the Alarms ............................................................................................................... 78
12.7 Command Line Interface (CLI) ................................................................................................................ 79
12.7.1 How to Access the CLI ....................................................................................................................... 79
12.7.2 Open the CLI using a Terminal Emulator ........................................................................................... 81
12.7.3 Log In as Expert ................................................................................................................................. 82
12.7.4 Show, Help and Context Sensitive Help ............................................................................................ 82
12.7.4.1 Show ........................................................................................................................................... 82
12.7.4.2 Help ............................................................................................................................................. 84
12.7.4.3 Context Sensitive Help "?" .......................................................................................................... 84
12.7.5 Navigate Through the Branches of the Device .................................................................................. 85
12.7.6 Go Into a Branch ................................................................................................................................ 85
12.7.7 Move Up One Level ........................................................................................................................... 85
12.7.8 Return to the Main Branch ................................................................................................................. 86
12.7.9 Supported Key Presses in the CLI ..................................................................................................... 87
12.7.10 Displayed Units ................................................................................................................................ 89
12.7.11 Get and Set Parameter Values ........................................................................................................ 89
12.7.12 Software Upgrade (CLI) ................................................................................................................... 91
12.7.13 Dynamic Tables ............................................................................................................................... 91
12.7.13.1 Show Tables ............................................................................................................................. 92

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted
Table of Contents MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.7.13.2 Change Parameters in a Table ................................................................................................. 92

12.7.13.3 Add a New Row to a Table ........................................................................................................ 92
12.7.13.4 Delete a Row from a Table ........................................................................................................ 93
12.8 SNMP ...................................................................................................................................................... 94
12.8.1 Consult the SNMP MIBs .................................................................................................................... 95
12.9 File Transfer Protocol (FTP) .................................................................................................................... 96

13 General Device Settings and Actions ........................................................... 98

13.1 Access Control ......................................................................................................................................... 98
13.2 License File ............................................................................................................................................. 99
13.2.1 License Upgrade ............................................................................................................................. 100
13.2.2 License Type ................................................................................................................................... 101
13.2.2.1 Permanent License ................................................................................................................... 101
13.2.2.2 Fractional Licenses ................................................................................................................... 102
13.3 Configuration Settings ........................................................................................................................... 103
13.3.1 Configuration File ............................................................................................................................. 104
13.3.2 Active Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 106
13.3.3 Saved Configuration ........................................................................................................................ 106
13.3.4 Save a Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 107
13.3.5 Import a Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 108
13.3.6 Load a Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 109
13.3.7 Export a Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 110
13.3.8 Delete a Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 111
13.3.9 Make a Configuration File Bootable ................................................................................................. 112
13.4 Software Upgrade ................................................................................................................................. 113
13.4.1 Software Upgrade Procedure .......................................................................................................... 113
13.5 Device Identification .............................................................................................................................. 115
13.6 Logging .................................................................................................................................................. 115
13.6.1 Syslog Filter ..................................................................................................................................... 116
13.6.2 Export or Clear Logging ................................................................................................................... 117
13.6.3 Interpretation of a Device Log File ................................................................................................... 117
13.7 Diagnostics Report ................................................................................................................................ 118
13.8 Date and Time ....................................................................................................................................... 119
13.9 Device Monitoring .................................................................................................................................. 121
13.10 Device Redundancy ............................................................................................................................ 121
13.11 Reset the Device ................................................................................................................................. 123
13.12 Alarm Handling .................................................................................................................................... 124
13.12.1 Alarm Masking ............................................................................................................................... 125
13.12.2 Alarm Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 126
13.12.3 Clear Alarm Counters .................................................................................................................... 128

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted
Table of Contents MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.13 Control Plane ....................................................................................................................................... 129

13.13.1 Configure the Controle Plane ......................................................................................................... 132
13.13.2 Master IP ....................................................................................................................................... 132
13.13.3 Encapsulator Configuration ........................................................................................................... 133
13.14 Remote Terminals ............................................................................................................................... 134
13.14.1 Configure the Terminals ................................................................................................................. 135
13.14.2 Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................... 136
13.15 Reference Clock .................................................................................................................................. 136
13.16 Antenna Control Interface .................................................................................................................... 137
13.16.1 Configuration Table ....................................................................................................................... 138
13.16.2 Monitor the Antenna Control Interface ........................................................................................... 141
13.16.3 Antenna Control Interface Alarm Table .......................................................................................... 142

14 Data Interfaces .............................................................................................. 143

14.1 Data Ethernet Interfaces ........................................................................................................................ 143
14.2 Data IP Connectivity .............................................................................................................................. 144
14.2.1 Virtual IP Address ............................................................................................................................ 145
14.2.2 IGMP Version ................................................................................................................................... 147
14.2.3 Multicast Memberships .................................................................................................................... 148
14.3 Data Ethernet Link Redundancy ............................................................................................................ 149
14.4 BBF over IP In ....................................................................................................................................... 151
14.5 BBF over IP Out .................................................................................................................................... 155
14.6 L-Band Rx A / L-Band Rx B ................................................................................................................... 157

15 Feature Descriptions .................................................................................... 158

15.1 Modulator ............................................................................................................................................... 158
15.1.1 Modulation Mode ............................................................................................................................. 159
15.1.2 Transmit ........................................................................................................................................... 160
15.1.3 Output Frequency and Output Band ................................................................................................ 160
15.1.4 Roll-Off Factor and Occupied Bandwidth ........................................................................................ 161
15.1.5 Spectrum Polarity ............................................................................................................................. 163
15.1.6 Output Level ..................................................................................................................................... 163
15.1.7 Clock Output .................................................................................................................................... 164
15.1.8 Carrier Modulation ........................................................................................................................... 164
15.1.9 Amplitude Slope Equalizer ............................................................................................................... 166
15.1.10 Symbol Rate ................................................................................................................................... 166
15.1.11 Stream Mode ................................................................................................................................. 166
15.1.12 Measured Packet Count and Measured Bit Rate .......................................................................... 166
15.1.13 Standby Redundancy State ........................................................................................................... 167
15.1.14 Transmit Ctrl ................................................................................................................................... 168

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted
Table of Contents MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.14.1 Impact of Alarms on the Transmission .................................................................................... 169

15.1.14.2 Allow Changes During Transmission ...................................................................................... 170
15.1.15 Link Optimization ........................................................................................................................... 171
15.1.15.1 Transponder Operation Mode ................................................................................................. 171
15.1.15.2 Maximum S2 Ext MODCOD .................................................................................................... 172
15.1.16 External Converter ......................................................................................................................... 172
15.1.17 Modulation ..................................................................................................................................... 173
15.1.17.1 Physical and Baseband Layer Efficiency ................................................................................ 173
15.1.17.2 Physical Layer Scrambling ...................................................................................................... 173
15.1.17.2.1 Dummy PL Scrambler Mode ............................................................................................. 174
15.1.17.2.2 Physical Layer Scrambler Signature ................................................................................. 174
15.1.17.2.3 Roll-Off Signaling ............................................................................................................. 175
15.2 DVB Carrier Identification ...................................................................................................................... 176
15.2.1 Device Unique ID ............................................................................................................................. 176
15.2.2 Device Variable Parameters ............................................................................................................ 176
15.2.3 How does it Work? ........................................................................................................................... 177
15.2.4 What to do when Interference is Detected? ..................................................................................... 177
15.3 Equalink® 3 ........................................................................................................................................... 178
15.4 PRBS Generator ................................................................................................................................... 180
15.4.1 How to Monitor the Outgoing PRBS Bit Rate ................................................................................... 181
15.5 Reference Clock .................................................................................................................................... 182
15.6 Demodulator .......................................................................................................................................... 183
15.6.1 Enable/Disable Demodulator ........................................................................................................... 184
15.6.2 Demodulation Mode ......................................................................................................................... 184
15.6.3 Input Frequency ............................................................................................................................... 185
15.6.4 Symbol Rate ..................................................................................................................................... 185
15.6.5 Acquisition Range ............................................................................................................................ 185
15.6.6 Roll-Off Factor and Occupied Bandwidth ........................................................................................ 185
15.6.7 Input Selection ................................................................................................................................. 188
15.6.8 Physical Layer Scrambler Signature ................................................................................................ 188
15.6.9 LNB Power Supply ........................................................................................................................... 189
15.6.10 Transponder Operation Mode Demodulator .................................................................................. 190
15.6.11 Spectral Inversion .......................................................................................................................... 191
15.6.12 Backup Carrier ............................................................................................................................... 191
15.6.12.1 Configure the Backup Carrier .................................................................................................. 193
15.6.12.2 Make the Backup Carrier Permanent ...................................................................................... 194
15.6.13 Monitoring Parameters ................................................................................................................... 195
15.6.14 Reset MODCOD Statistics ............................................................................................................. 197
15.6.15 MODCOD Statistics ....................................................................................................................... 197
15.6.16 External Converter ......................................................................................................................... 199

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted
Table of Contents MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.6.16.1 Direct Spectrum ...................................................................................................................... 200

15.6.16.2 Inverted Spectrum ................................................................................................................... 201
15.7 FlexACM® ............................................................................................................................................. 202
15.7.1 MODCODs in Satellite Communication ........................................................................................... 203
15.7.2 Why ACM? ....................................................................................................................................... 204
15.7.3 FlexACM in a Point to Point Setup ................................................................................................... 207
15.8 Automatic Uplink Power Control ............................................................................................................ 208
15.8.1 AUPC Link Requirements ................................................................................................................ 208
15.8.2 Back Ground Information ................................................................................................................. 209
15.8.3 AUPC Approaches ........................................................................................................................... 210
15.8.3.1 Beacon Based ........................................................................................................................... 210
15.8.3.2 Simple Implementation of AUPC ............................................................................................... 210
15.8.3.3 Improved AUPC Mechanism (implemented in the MDM6000 and MCD6000) ......................... 211
15.8.4 AUPC ............................................................................................................................................... 211
15.8.5 AUPC Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 211
15.8.5.1 Gather all Block Up Converter Specifications ........................................................................... 213
15.8.5.2 Configuration of the AUPC Controller ....................................................................................... 213
15.8.5.3 AUPC Controller Monitoring Parameters ................................................................................... 217
15.8.5.4 Configure the AUPC Client ........................................................................................................ 218
15.8.5.5 AUPC Logging .......................................................................................................................... 221
15.9 Device Redundancy .............................................................................................................................. 223
15.10 DC BUC Power On L-Band Tx ............................................................................................................. 225
15.10.1 Back Panel Description .................................................................................................................. 225
15.10.2 LED Behavior of the DC BUC Power for L-Band Tx ...................................................................... 226
15.10.3 Set the DC BUC Power for L-Band Tx ........................................................................................... 227
15.11 Stream Encapsulation ......................................................................................................................... 228
15.11.1 General Encapsulation Settings ..................................................................................................... 229
15.11.1.1 Carrier Settings ....................................................................................................................... 232
15.11.1.2 Delay Control ........................................................................................................................... 233
15.11.2 BBF Encapsulation ........................................................................................................................ 235
15.11.2.1 BBF Encapsulation ISIs .......................................................................................................... 236
15.11.2.2 BBF Encapsulation Channels ................................................................................................. 238
15.11.2.3 Traffic Shaping ........................................................................................................................ 241
15.11.2.4 Traffic Classification ................................................................................................................ 244
15.11.3 TS Encapsulation ........................................................................................................................... 246
15.11.3.1 TS Encapsulation ISIs ............................................................................................................. 247
15.11.3.2 TS Encapsulation PIDs ........................................................................................................... 248
15.11.3.3 TS Encapsulation Channels ................................................................................................... 249
15.11.3.4 Traffic Shaping ........................................................................................................................ 250
15.11.3.5 Traffic Classification ................................................................................................................ 253

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted
Table of Contents MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.4 QOS Rule to Drop Incoming Traffic ............................................................................................... 255

15.12 Stream Decapsulation ......................................................................................................................... 257
15.12.1 Decapsulation General Settings .................................................................................................... 257
15.12.2 BBF Decapsulation ........................................................................................................................ 259
15.12.2.1 BBF Decapsulation ISIs .......................................................................................................... 259
15.12.2.2 BBF Channel Decapsulation ................................................................................................... 260
15.12.3 Configure the TS Decapsulator ..................................................................................................... 261
15.12.3.1 Configure the TS Decapsulation ISIs ...................................................................................... 261
15.12.3.2 Configure the PIDs Decapsulation .......................................................................................... 262
15.12.3.3 Configure the Channels .......................................................................................................... 263
15.12.4 Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................... 264
15.13 Test Traffic Generator and Monitoring ................................................................................................. 265
15.13.1 Test Traffic Generator .................................................................................................................... 265
15.13.2 Test Traffic Monitoring ................................................................................................................... 267
15.14 Transparent BBF over IP ..................................................................................................................... 269
15.15 In-band Remote Management ............................................................................................................. 271
15.15.1 How to Configure the In-band Management Feature ..................................................................... 272
15.15.1.1 Hub Site .................................................................................................................................. 272
15.15.1.2 Remote Site ............................................................................................................................ 273
15.15.2 Example ......................................................................................................................................... 273
15.15.2.1 Configure the Hub Site ............................................................................................................ 274
15.15.2.2 Configure the Remote Site ...................................................................................................... 277
15.16 Bandwidth Cancellation ....................................................................................................................... 278
15.16.1 Block Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 279
15.16.2 Configuration and Monitoring Parameters ..................................................................................... 280
15.16.3 Practical Use Case ......................................................................................................................... 285
15.16.3.1 Configure the Hub Site ............................................................................................................ 287
15.16.3.2 Configure the Remote Site ...................................................................................................... 290
15.17 Layer 2 VLAN Termination .................................................................................................................. 292
15.17.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 292
15.17.2 Access VLAN Mechanism between Hub and Remote Sites ......................................................... 293
15.17.3 Access VLAN Mechanism between Remote and Hub .................................................................. 295

16 Appendix - Alarm List ................................................................................... 297

16.1 Generic Alarms ...................................................................................................................................... 298
16.2 Ethernet Interface Alarms ...................................................................................................................... 299
16.3 BBF over IP Alarms ............................................................................................................................... 300
16.4 Modulator Alarms ................................................................................................................................... 301
16.5 Reference Clock Alarms ........................................................................................................................ 302
16.6 Demodulator Alarms .............................................................................................................................. 303

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted
Table of Contents MDM6000 Satellite Modem

16.7 Alarms: BUC Power Alarms ................................................................................................................... 304

17 Appendix - Overview of the Used Technologies ....................................... 305

17.1 DVB-S2, DVB-S2X and S2 Extensions ................................................................................................. 305
17.1.1 DVB-S2 Standard ............................................................................................................................ 305
17.1.2 DVB-S2X Standard .......................................................................................................................... 306
17.1.3 S2 Extensions .................................................................................................................................. 307
17.2 Noise and Distortion Estimator (Node) .................................................................................................. 309
17.2.1 How Does Node Work ...................................................................................................................... 309
17.3 Wideband .............................................................................................................................................. 311
17.4 Clean Channel Technology® ................................................................................................................ 311

18 Appendix - Classification Expressions ...................................................... 312

18.1 Layer 2 Examples .................................................................................................................................. 315
18.1.1 Frequently used Layer 2 Expressions .............................................................................................. 315
18.1.2 Expression: All ................................................................................................................................. 316
18.1.3 Expression: Layer 2 VLAN ID ........................................................................................................... 318
18.1.4 Expression: VLAN ID and Destination IP ......................................................................................... 320
18.2 Layer 3 Examples .................................................................................................................................. 322
18.2.1 Frequently used Layer 3 Expressions .............................................................................................. 322
18.2.2 Expression: ip4 dst net 0.0.0.0/0 ...................................................................................................... 323
18.2.3 Expression: ip4 dst 10.10.10.0/24 ................................................................................................... 325
18.2.4 Expression: ip4 dst net 10.10.10.0/24 and protocol icmp ................................................................ 327

19 Appendix - Generic Stream Encapsulation ................................................ 329

19.1 GSE Header .......................................................................................................................................... 330

20 Appendix - Technical Specifications .......................................................... 331

20.1 Input Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................... 331
20.2 Modulation and Demodulation .............................................................................................................. 331
20.3 Modulation Interfaces ............................................................................................................................ 335
20.4 Demodulation Interfaces ....................................................................................................................... 337
20.5 Internal 10 MHz Reference Frequency ................................................................................................. 338
20.6 Generic .................................................................................................................................................. 338
20.7 Physical ................................................................................................................................................. 338
20.8 Demodulation Performances ................................................................................................................. 339
20.8.1 DVB-S2 Performance ...................................................................................................................... 339
20.8.1.1 DVB-S2 Performance (FER<1E-5) Normal Frames/Pilots Off .................................................. 339
20.8.1.2 DVB-S2 Performance (FER<1E-5) Normal Frames/Pilots On .................................................. 340
20.8.1.3 DVB-S2 Performance (FER<1E-5) Short Frames/Pilots Off ..................................................... 341

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted
Table of Contents MDM6000 Satellite Modem

20.8.1.4 DVB-S2 Performance (FER<1E-5) Short Frames/Pilots On ..................................................... 342

20.8.2 DVB-S2X Performance .................................................................................................................... 343
20.8.2.1 DVB-S2X Performance (FER<1E-5) Normal Frames/Pilots Off ................................................ 343
20.8.2.2 DVB-S2X Performance (FER<1E-5) Normal Frames/Pilots On ................................................ 346
20.8.2.3 DVB-S2X Performance (FER<1E-5) Short Frames/Pilots Off .................................................. 349
20.8.2.4 DVB-S2X Performance (FER<1E-5) Short Frames/Pilots On .................................................. 351
20.9 Bandwidth Cancellation Performance ................................................................................................... 353
20.9.1 Symmetrical ..................................................................................................................................... 353
20.9.2 Asymmterical ................................................................................................................................... 355

21 Appendix - Back Panel Combinations ........................................................ 357

21.1 Module 1 ................................................................................................................................................ 357
21.1.1 Demodulator Input and Modulator Output Interface ......................................................................... 357
21.1.2 Mains Power Supply Units ............................................................................................................... 359
21.2 Module 2 ................................................................................................................................................ 361
21.3 Example ................................................................................................................................................. 362

22 Appendix - Acronyms ................................................................................... 364

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted
Copyright MDM6000 Satellite Modem

1 Copyright
© October 15, 2015
The material contained in this document is confidential and intended for use only by parties
authorized by Newtec Cy N.V.
All Rights Reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means whether, electronic, mechanical, or otherwise
without the prior written permission of:

Newtec Cy N.V.
Laarstraat 5
9100 Sint-Niklaas, Belgium
Tel: +32 3 780 65 00
Fax: +32 3 780 65 49
www.newtec.eu
[email protected]

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 1/367

EU Compliancy Statements MDM6000 Satellite Modem

2 EU Compliancy Statements

2.1 Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment

(R&TTE) Directive 1995/5/EC
We,

Declare that the following product:

• Product number: MDM6000
• Type identifier: NTC/2253

to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the essential requirements of European Union
Directive 1999/5/EC Radio and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment Directive Essential
Requirement 3.1(a), 3.1 (b), 3.2.

Done at St-Niklaas, on October 15, 2015

Serge Van Herck,

CEO

Newtec Cy N.V.
Laarstraat 5
B-9100 Sint-Niklaas
Belgium.
Tel: +32 3 780 65 00
Fax: +32 3 780 65 49

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 2/367

EU Compliancy Statements MDM6000 Satellite Modem

2.2 EMC Information

Relevant EMC information (to FCC rules)
This equipment has been tested and was found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses and radiates radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

Do not operate this equipment in a residential area, as it is likely to cause harmful interference.
When this is the case, you will be required to correct the interference at your own expense.

2.3 Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS)

(Directive 2011/65/EU)
The undersigned hereby confirms the following statement:
We hereby declare that this equipment is compliant to the RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU.
Done at St-Niklaas, on October 15, 2015 .

Serge Van Herck,

CEO

Newtec Cy N.V.
Laarstraat 5
B-9100 Sint-Niklaas
Belgium
Tel: +32 3 780 65 00
Fax: +32 3 780 65 49

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 3/367

EU Compliancy Statements MDM6000 Satellite Modem

2.4 Registration, Evaluation and Authorization of Chemicals

(REACH)
European Regulation N°1907/2006 "REACH" (Registration, Evaluation, and Authorization of
Chemicals), came into force on June 1st, 2007. It aims at regulating the use of the chemical
substances within the European Union.
We are committed to meeting our legal obligations under REACH, as a manufacturer of articles and
as a downstream user of chemicals products.
In order to comply with the REACH regulation, Newtec Cy N.V. has put into place processes and
procedures to ensure implementation and compliance with the regulation, especially the assessment
of the presence of Substances of Very High Concern (SVHC's) and communication along the supply
chain to both suppliers and customers.
All products manufactured by Newtec Cy N.V. fall under the category of Articles within the REACH
Regulation and none of them present the notion of intentional release of SVHC's, therefore no
obligation of registration applies.
Done at St-Niklaas, on October 15, 2015 .

Serge Van Herck,

CEO

Newtec Cy N.V.
Laarstraat 5
B-9100 Sint-Niklaas
Belgium
Tel: +32 3 780 65 00
Fax: +32 3 780 65 49

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 4/367

EU Compliancy Statements MDM6000 Satellite Modem

2.5 WEEE – Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment

Directive
The undersigned hereby confirms the following statement:
We hereby declare that this equipment is compliant to the WEEE Directive 2012/19/EU.
Done at St-Niklaas, on October 15, 2015 .

Serge Van Herck,

CEO

Newtec Cy N.V.
Laarstraat 5
B-9100 Sint-Niklaas
Belgium.
Tel: +32 3 780 65 00
Fax: +32 3 780 65 49

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 5/367

Safety Regulations MDM6000 Satellite Modem

3 Safety Regulations
Please read this chapter before you install and use this equipment.
To ensure your safety, the equipment has been designed to comply with the following safety
standards:

Safety of Information Technology Equipment.

• IEC 60950-1:2006/A11:2009/A1:2010/A12:2011
• EN 60950-1:2006/A11:2009/A1:2010/A12:2011
• UL 60950-1, Second Edition
• CSA C22.2 N°. 60950-1-07.Second Edition

Before you start to install and operate the device, please make sure you observe the following
points:
• The equipment described in this manual is designed to be used by properly trained personnel
only. Only qualified personnel who are aware of hazards involved may adjust, maintain and repair
the exposed equipment.

No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified personnel.

To prevent electrical shock, do not remove covers.

• To use the equipment correctly and safely, it is essential that both operating and servicing
personnel follow generally accepted safety procedures in addition to the safety precautions
specified in this manual. Warning and caution statements and/or symbols are marked on the
equipment when necessary. Whenever it is likely that safety protection is impaired, immediately
switch off the equipment and secure it against unintended operation. Inform the appropriate
servicing authority about the problem. For example, safety is likely to be impaired if the
equipment fails to perform the intended measurements or shows visible damage.
• The only way to shut down the device is to disconnect the power cable from the power
connector. Therefore make sure that the power cable is accessible and not obstructed when the
device is operational. For more information please refer to section: Power Connector on page 23.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 6/367

Safety Regulations MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Additional safety requirements for Finland, Norway and Sweden

Telecommunication connections and cable distribution system.
Special conditions apply to the use of this equipment in Finland, Sweden and Norway
due to different earthing arrangements in these countries. Therefore it is essential that
the installation is done by authorized personnel and according to the national
requirements only.
This equipment is specified for use in a restricted access location only, where
equipotential bonding has been applied and which has provision for a permanently
connected protective earthing conductor.
A protective earthing conductor must be installed by a Service Person.

Additional safety requirements for Norway and Sweden

Equipment connected to the protective earthing of the building installation through the
mains connection or through other equipment with a connection to protective earthing
- and to a cable distribution system using coaxial cable, may in some circumstances
create a fire hazard. Connection to a cable distribution system has therefore to be
provided through a device providing electrical isolation below a certain frequency
range (galvanic isolator, see EN 60728-11)."
NOTE: In Norway, due to regulation for installations of cable distribution systems, and
in Sweden, a galvanic isolator shall provide electrical insulation below 5 MHz. The
insulation shall withstand a dielectric strength of 1,5 kV r.m.s., 50 Hz or 60 Hz, for 1
min.
Translation to Norwegian:
Utstyr som er koplet til beskyttelsesjord via nettplugg og/eller via annet jordtilkoplet
utstyr - og er tilkoplet et kabel-TV nett, kan forårsake brannfare. For å unngå dette
skal det ved tilkopling av utstyret til kabel-TV nettet installeres en galvanisk isolator
mellom utstyret og kabel-TV nettet.
Translation to Swedish:
"Utrustning som är kopplad till skyddsjord via jordat vägguttag och/eller via annan
utrustning och samtidigt är kopplad till kabel-TV nät kan i vissa fall medfõra risk fõr
brand. Fõr att undvika detta skall vid anslutning av utrustningen till kabel-TV nät
galvanisk isolator finnas mellan utrustningen och kabel-TV nätet."

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 7/367

Safety Regulations MDM6000 Satellite Modem

3.1 Environmental
Operating the equipment in an environment other than that stated in the specifications also
invalidates the safety compliance.
Do not use the equipment in an environment in which the unit is exposed to:
• Unpressurized altitudes higher than 2000 meters
• Extreme temperatures outside the stated operating range operating
temperature range 0 to + 50°C
• Excessive dust
• Moist or humid atmosphere above 85% RH
• Excessive vibration
• Flammable gases
• Corrosive or explosive atmospheres
• Direct sunlight

Use a slightly damp cloth to clean the casing of the equipment. Do not use any
cleaning liquids containing alcohol, methylated spirit or ammonia, etc.

3.2 Rack Mounting Instructions

• Elevated Operating ambient - If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating
ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient. Therefore,
consideration should be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the
maximum ambient temperature (Tma) specified by the manufacturer. 50°C.
• Reduced Air Flow - Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air
flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromized.
• Mechanical Loading - Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous
condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading.
• Circuit Overloading - Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the
supply circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection
and supply wiring. Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used
when addressing this concern.
• Reliable earthing - Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular
attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch
circuit (e.g. use of power strips).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 8/367

Safety Regulations MDM6000 Satellite Modem

3.3 Earth Ground

On the rear panel of the equipment an earth ground is available.

It is provided to:
• Ensure that all equipment chassis fixed within a rack are at the same technical earth potential.
Connect a wire between the technical earth terminal and a suitable point on the rack.
• Eliminate the migration of stray charges when connecting between equipment.

In accordance to TNV-1 grounding requirements, the grounding thread of the device

must be connected according to the local regulations.

The following figure shows the position and how to connect the earth ground.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 9/367

Options MDM6000 Satellite Modem

4 Options
Newtec MDM6000 Satellite Modem Release 3.1 Ordering nr.

Configuration Options MDM6000

Category

Hardware Platform Chassis Type 03 (Modem) CH-03

Operating Software MDM6000 Major Software R3* MS-30

Efficiency DVB-S2, DVB-S2X and S2 Ext, CCT and AUPC OP-04

Optimization
Package

For a modem or demodulator, select 1 option

Demodulator Class 3 (wide band up to 133 MBaud) DH-03

Hardware

For a modem or modulator, select 1 option

Modulator Output IF+ L-band with switchable 10 MHz out* OU-02

Interface
IF+L-band + 10 MHz output + 24/48 V BUC** OU-06

Select 1 option

Internal Reference Standard 10 MHz IR-00

Clock
Very High Stability 10 MHz IR-02

Select max 1 option

Reference Clock 10 MHz Reference Output (BNC) RO-01

Output

Select 1 option

Mains Power Supply PSU Single AC 110/240 V PS-00

Unit
PSU Dual Redundant AC 110/240 V PS-01

PSU Single DC 48 V** PS-10

PSU Dual DC 48 V** PS-11

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 10/367

Options MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Newtec MDM6000 Satellite Modem Release 3.1 Ordering nr.

For a modem or modulator, select 1 option

Outbound Rates Outbound Rate* 1 - 425 Mbps

For a modem or demodulator, select 1 option

Inbound rates Inbound Rate* 1 - 425 Mbps

Additional Options
Category

Select max 1 option

Outbound ACM TX FlexACM point-to-point * 1 - 425 Mbps

Select max 1 option

Inbound ACM RX FlexACM Client* 1 - 425 Mbps

Select max. 1 option

Bandwidth Full license or fractional license* 1 - 425 Mbps

cancellation

Select max. 1 option

BBF output Transparent BBF over IP output* TB-01

Select max. 1 option

Pre-Distortion Equalink 3* AE-01

Select max. 1 option

Modulator Output L-Band output N to SMA output adapter OU-10

Connector

Services Category

Max. 1 option per category

Support Care Pack 3 Basic GA-08

Care Pack 3 Enhanced GA-09

(*) Selectable via licence key.

(**) Option PS-10 and PS-11 are mutually exclusive with option OU-06
Contact your sales representative for details ([email protected]).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 11/367

Feedback MDM6000 Satellite Modem

5 Feedback
Newtec encourages your comments concerning this document. We are committed to providing
documentation that meets your needs.
Please send any comments by contacting us at [email protected].
You can access myNewtec from the Newtec website: http://www.newtec.eu/
Simply click on the Login button available on the toolbar at the top right-hand side of your screen
and enter your login credentials.

Please include document and any comment, error found or suggestion for improvement you have
regarding this document.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 12/367

About this Manual MDM6000 Satellite Modem

6 About this Manual

This document is intended to help you to:
• Understand the different possibilities of the MDM6000.
• Understand the basic features of the MDM6000.
• Find your way connecting and configuring the MDM6000.

6.1 Version History and Applicability

Document Date Subject and Comment

Version Release Version

1.0 October MDM6000 Initial release, updates in this release:

2015
R3.1 • Layer 2 VLAN termination
• Bandwidth Cancellation
• Temporary Licenses

6.2 Cautions and Symbols

The following symbols appear in this manual:
A caution message indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury. It may also refer to a procedure or practice that, if not
correctly followed, could result in equipment damage or destruction.

A hint message indicates information for the proper operation of your equipment,
including helpful hints, shortcuts or important reminders.

A reference message is used to direct to a location in a document with related document

or a web-link.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 13/367

About this Manual MDM6000 Satellite Modem

6.3 Related Documentation

• The MDM6000 Reference Manual describes the parameters available in the device.
• The Configuration Guidelines Automated Equalink 3 this document describes the different
calibration procedures.
• Device leaflet containing the specifications (We refer to http://www.newtec.eu).
• You can access myNewtec from the Newtec website: http://www.newtec.eu
Simply click on the Login button available on the toolbar at the top right-hand side of your screen
and enter your login credentials.
• The System Integration Guide for MDM6000 describes how to integrate the device into a network
management environment.
• The Configuration Guideline for a Point to Point system setup describes how to make a system
setup between a HUB and a remote site.
• The MDM6000 Quick Start Guide describes how to Set the Management IP Address of your
device and how to install the sliders and device into the rack.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 14/367

Introduction MDM6000 Satellite Modem

7 Introduction
The MDM6000 Satellite Modem is a versatile next generation modem optimized for a wide range of
applications such as cellular backhauling, IP trunking and fiber restoration. The MDM6000 modem is
typically installed at both ends of a point-to-point satellite link or at the remote sites of a star network.
The unit can work as a modulator, demodulator or modem depending on the network configuration
and integrates seamlessly with terrestrial networks and equipment. The modem is in full compliance
with the DVB-S2 and DVB-S2X standards, achieving the highest possible efficiency at maximum
service availability.
.

7.1 Efficiency at the Core

The Newtec MDM6000 Satellite Modem combines a number of innovative elements to improve
current market available efficiencies, thereby lowering the overall Total Cost of Ownership.
New modulation and Forward Error Correction (FEC) codes up to 256APSK in the DVB-S2X
standard in combination with innovative technologies such as 133 Mbaud, Newtec's Clean Channel
Technology®, Bandwidth Cancellation (BWC), Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC), Newtec's
FlexACM®, QoS Shaping and Equalink® 3 are embedded in the modem and bring the satellite link
to full efficiency.

Depending on the application, the Newtec MDM6000 modem can be used in conjunction with the
Newtec HUB6000 Satellite Hub. The performance can be increased even more by adding Newtec’s
network optimization technologies such as acceleration, compression, shaping and bandwidth
management.

7.2 Optimal Availability

Newtec's auto-adaptive FlexACM® technology is incorporated in the MDM6000 modem and deals
with fading conditions (rain, dust, interference) and inclined orbit satellites. Thanks to FlexACM
these fading conditions will no longer interrupt the transmission between the hub and remote sites
nor result in loss of data. The maximum possible throughput can be achieved at all times.
Additionally, the Automatic Uplink Power Control mechanism ensures maximum use of the link
budget at all times.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 15/367

Introduction MDM6000 Satellite Modem

7.3 Flexibility and Scalability Matching Market Business Models

The MDM6000 modem provides a scalable and flexible platform, which allows customers to grow
their business depending on their application and investment plan. The modem comes with all
features that can be unlocked by means of a very granular licensing scheme depending on the
needs as the business grows.
The built-in bandwidth canceller completely operates in the digital domain providing unsurpassed
performance with the lowest possible residual cancellation noise resulting in the highest spectral
efficiency. Non-linear post compensation (NLPC) performs realtime analysis of the complete
received spectrum and reduces intermodulation interference that affects the demodulated carrier.
Fractional licensing of the bandwidth cancellation option allows for cost-effective redundant setups.
To facilitate ordering, the modem comes with IF and L-band for both TX and RX by default. The
MDM6000 Satellite Modem can be easily monitored and controlled via a comprehensive front panel
menu, CLI, advanced web GUI and via SNMP protocol. This enables easy integration into any
industry-standard EMS/NMS system.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 16/367

Physical Description MDM6000 Satellite Modem

8 Physical Description

8.1 Front Panel Description

The device can be configured, controlled and monitored using the front panel. The front panel
consists out of the following parts.

For more information please refer to section: Front Panel on page 72.

8.1.1 Display
The display consists of a 32 x 240 pixels LCD screen.
• The top rows indicates the tree menu pane.
• The bottom row indicates the root menu pane.

Menu Tree
The device management model is designed as a menu tree. The menu tree shows the organization
of the parameters in the device. The tree is built up out of a root, branches, sub branches and leafs.
• Root: Represents the complete device configuration.
• Branch/Sub branch: Represents functional blocks that group leafs/parameters that are closely
related to one another.
• Leafs: The leafs represent the parameters or commands that are used to perform a configuration.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 17/367

Physical Description MDM6000 Satellite Modem

8.1.2 Soft Buttons and Navigation Buttons

Use the navigation button and soft buttons to navigate through the menu tree.

• The function of the soft buttons varies depending on the context.

Their meaning is defined by the menu pane block setting atop of each button.
• Use the navigation buttons for navigating through the Tree menu pane.
• Use the OK button to confirm a selection.
• Use the ESC button to ignore a selection and to go up in the menu tree.

8.1.3 Front Panel Management Interface

The management interface allows the system administrators to manage the MDM6000 Satellite
Modem and monitor its operation.

Note that this interface is disabled by default.

This connector has the same function as the management interface(s)
on the back panel.

The management can also be done by using the GUI, CLI or SNMP. For more information please
refer to section: How to Manage the Device on page 46

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 18/367

Physical Description MDM6000 Satellite Modem

8.1.4 USB Interface

The USB interface is a flash drive connector that can be used to import a configuration or license file
but also to perform a software upgrade.

Log in as expert user to perform a license import.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 19/367

Physical Description MDM6000 Satellite Modem

8.1.5 LED Status Indicators

The following table describes the LED status indicators.

LED LED Description

Color
Green There are no alarms present on the device.
ACT Yellow Alarms other than the general device alarm or interface alarm are
ALARM present on the device.
Red A general device or interface alarm is present on the device.
MEM Yellow A memorized alarm is present on the device.
ALARM
Off Indicates that all alarms are cleared, no memorized alarm is
present on the device.
TEST Green Green Indicates that the internal PRBS generator is activated on
the device.
Off The internal PRBS generator is not activated on the device.
Tx ON Green The device is transmitting.
Off The transmission is disabled.
Rx LOCK Green The demodulator part of the modem is locked.
Yellow The demodulator is in PL lock (Physical Layer lock).
• Physical layer headers are decoded properly
• An Es/No estimation is available
• Equalizer is operational

But no decodable BB frame was received

Red The demodulator part of the modem cannot lock to the incoming
carrier.
Off The demodulator part of the modem is disabled.
Data Green The incoming or outgoing data signal is valid.
Yellow The input / output data interface is configured but there is no
activity monitored during the last second.
Off The input / output interfaces are not enabled.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 20/367

Physical Description MDM6000 Satellite Modem

8.2 Back Panel Description

The following figure shows the possible connections on the MDM6000. The back panel connections
available depend on the specific hardware configuration of your device.

The maximum force that may be used to fix the SMA (L-Band monitor OUT) connector
is restricted to 1.2Nm!
The maximum force for the other connectors is restricted to 1Nm!
When one of these limits is exceeded, the connectors can be damaged and the
correct functioning of the connectors cannot be guaranteed.

The following figure serves as an example to get an overview on the specifications of

the connectors.
The combination of connectors and modules displayed might deviate from your
particular combination.
Please refer to Appendix - Back Panel Combinations on page 357 to get an overview on
the possible back panel combinations.

The following back panel applies to a configuration with sales options:

• DH-03
• OU-02
• RO-01
• PS-00

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 21/367

Physical Description MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 22/367

Physical Description MDM6000 Satellite Modem

8.2.1 Power Connector

This connector has a protective earthing incorporated.
Insert the mains plug only in a socket that has a protective earth contact.

Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the device causes
hazards or electrical shocks.

The only way to shut down the device is to disconnect the power cable from the
power connector. Therefore, make sure that the power cable is accessible and not
obstructed when the device is operational.

The power supply has the following specifications: 90-130 & 180-260 Vac, 105 VA, 47-63 Hz.
To have power redundancy, a dual power supply can be ordered (ordering nr. PS-01).
• It is advisable to connect the two mains plugs to two different power circuits, so the device
remains operational if one of these circuits fails (for example: fuse blown).

The equipment with redundant power supply has more than one power supply cord.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, disconnect two power supply cords before
servicing.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 23/367

Physical Description MDM6000 Satellite Modem

8.2.2 Earth Ground

On the rear panel of the equipment an earth ground is available.

It is provided to:
• Ensure that all equipment chassis fixed within a rack are at the same technical earth potential.
Connect a wire between the technical earth terminal and a suitable point on the rack.
• Eliminate the migration of stray charges when connecting between equipment.

In accordance to TNV-1 grounding requirements, the grounding thread of the device

must be connected according to the local regulations.

The following figure shows the position and how to connect the earth ground.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 24/367

Physical Description MDM6000 Satellite Modem

8.2.3 Craft Interface

The craft interface is a SUBD 9 pin connector interface that can be used to manage the device using
the command line interface (CLI). For more information please refer to section:
Command Line Interface (CLI) on page 79
It is used to control the device over RS232.
The line settings for the craft interface are:
• Speed 115200 baud
• Eight data bits
• No parity bit
• One stop bit

Use the following pin connections to create a crossover cable between the MDM6000
Satellite Modem and the managing device.

Pin Name Function

1 Not connected

2 Rx-D Receive Data

3 Tx-D Transmit Data

4 Not connected

5 GND Shield ground

6 Not connected

7 Not connected

8 Not connected

9 Not connected

The following figure shows the craft interface connection.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 25/367

Physical Description MDM6000 Satellite Modem

8.2.4 Alarm Interface

The alarm interface can be used to build up device redundancy switching systems.

When using the USS0202 Universal Redundancy Switch it is not mandatory to use
alarm contacts. The Universal Redundancy Switch can also gather the alarm status
from the different pieces of equipment in the setup over the management interface.
To enable device redundancy please refer to section: Device Redundancy on page 121

Connect the alarm interfaces.

The contacts are normally closed to insure that an alarm is generated when the alarm cables are
removed.
Refer to the following figures for the pin layout:

Pin Layout Technical Representation of the Pin Layout

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 26/367

Physical Description MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The following figure shows how to connect the alarm cables in a 1+1 redundancy system.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 27/367

Block Diagram MDM6000 Satellite Modem

9 Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram of the MDM6000 Satellite Modem. The block diagram
represents the main functional blocks in the device and the data flow through the device.

Depending on the hardware and software configuration of the device, some functional blocks can be
available or not.

The block diagram is derived from the synoptic view of the Graphical User Interface.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 28/367

Block Diagram MDM6000 Satellite Modem

9.1 Device Management

This functional block contains all the configuration parameters concerning the management
interfaces.
In this block, it is also possible to configure or look up the following:
• Ethernet connectivity
• IP connectivity
• Interface Link Redundancy
• Device Redundancy
• Identification of the device
• Consult all the device options that are activated on the device including the sales code

9.2 Data Input and Output Interfaces

These Ethernet connectors are bidirectional and are used as input and output interfaces,
transporting IP traffic.
Configure the Ethernet and IP connectivity, including the data gateway IP address of the data
interfaces. Also configure the data interface link redundancy (bonding) in this block.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 29/367

Block Diagram MDM6000 Satellite Modem

9.3 BBF over IP In

This block is used when the GSE (Generic Stream Encapsulation) is done using an external
NOP1760 for very high rate satellite links.

This functional block takes in BBFs (Baseband Frames) over IP and indicates if they are received
correctly.
The IP packets are received on one of the two data interfaces. The incoming BBFs are monitored.
The following parameters are monitored, total BBF Input rate, the total BBF Forwarded frames
(towards the modulator) and the amount of dropped frames.
This block is also responsible for analyzing (stripping off) the IP header. The IP header contains,
next to the destination IP address (Data1/Data2 or Data Bond) also wether or not the MDM6000
belongs to a multicasts group or if it is unicast.
When the device belongs to a multicasts group, the multicasts IP Address must be entered along
with the corresponding UDP port. When both parameters are correct the BBFs are transferred
towards the modulator block.
The following figure shows how the BBF over IP block strips off of the IP header and that it is directly
mapped into BBFs.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 30/367

Block Diagram MDM6000 Satellite Modem

9.4 Encapsulation

Encapsulator Protocols
The data inserted can be encapsulated by the following protocols:
• Protocols that are optimized for the DVB-S2 standard.
Typically used in applications where bandwidth efficiency is important, such as IP backbone or IP
trunking applications.
– GSE (Generic Stream Encapsulation) is a standard DVB protocol and generates marginally
less overhead than XPE.
– XPE (Extended Performance Encapsulation) is a Newtec Proprietary protocol and in general
used in combination with Newtec products such as EL470, EL970 or other compatible
Newtec products.
Note that XPE was the forerunner of GSE because GSE was not standardized yet.
• Protocols that are compatible with the regular MPEG Transport Streams (DVB-S standard).
Typically used when compatibility with legacy receiver products or interoperability with low cost
IP receivers or set top boxes are necessary.
– MPE (Multi Protocol Encapsulation), was the first available protocol and therefor widely used
by many legacy receivers.
– ULE (Ultra Light Encapsulation), is a protocol that is more flexible and next to this offers an
increased efficiency (better throughput).

Note that the MPEG TS generated by the MDM6000 is not suitable for broadcast
transmission networks due to the absence of timing and signaling.

Channels
Once the encapsulation protocol is selected, the data is put into a channel (logical pipe) according to
the selected protocol.
• Incase of the GSE or XPE protocol an ISI (Input Stream Identifier) value must be defined for the
receiver site to be able to receive the data.
Next to this it is possible to use a label (MAC address or destination address) of the receiving
device.
• Incase of the MPE or ULE protocol an ISI and a PID (Program Identifier) is needed.
Next to this it is required for MPE to enter the label (MAC address) of the receiving device for
ULE a label is optional.

Note that to create a valid MPEG TS a PID must be defined

(as it is an essential part of the MPEG TS).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 31/367

Block Diagram MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Traffic Classification
The encapsulation block also takes care of the traffic classification and shaping according to the
configured rules per terminal or for groups of terminals, allowing even hierarchical traffic shaping.

Overall Monitoring
The output of this block are BBFs that are forwarded to the modulator block.
The monitoring parameters of this block allow you to get a global overview of the total amount of
forwarded bits, bytes and packets.
It also indicates the number of dropped bytes and packets.

Traffic Shaping Monitoring

The traffic shaping monitoring parameters provide a detailed overview of the data flow through a
shaping node.

Channel Monitoring
The channel monitoring parameter indicate per configured channel the nominal and actual MODCOD
and the used encapsulation protocol.
When ACM is enabled it is possible to immediately find out the actual MODCOD that is used for the
specific channel and how much MODCOD changes that had occurred during the last monitoring
iteration.

For more information please refer to section: Stream Encapsulation. on page 228

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 32/367

Block Diagram MDM6000 Satellite Modem

9.5 Modulator

The modulator takes in the BBFs and applies the selected modulation mode.
The following parameters are set in this block:
• DVB-S2 or DVB-S2X or S2 Extensions
• Transmit
• Output Level
• Output Frequency
• Symbol Rate
• ...
After modulation, the signal is made available on either the L-band or IF-output
(depending on the device configuration).

9.5.1 PRBS Generator

The modem provides a build-in PRBS (Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence) generator. Use the
generator to perform basic tests on the device and/or check the satellite link conditions.
The Test LED on the front panel and in the status bar of the GUI is green when the PRBS generator
is activated. For more information please refer to section: PRBS Generator. on page 180

9.5.2 L-band TX or IF-band TX Interfaces

Depending on the ordered hardware and software, the following data output interfaces are available.
• An L-BAND Tx or IF-BAND Tx output is used for the transmission of RF signals.
The possible options are:
• L-BAND with switchable 10 MHz output (950-150 MHz) ordering nr. OU-00.
• IF-BAND (50-80 MHz) ordering nr. OU-01.
• IF + L-band with switchable 10 MHz output, ordering nr. OU-02.
It is possible to multiplex a 10 MHz reference signal on the L-band interface for an outdoor BUC
(Block UP Converter).
• L-band with switchable 10 MHz output and 24/48 V DC BUC power (on the L-band only),
ordering nr. OU-05.
• IF + L-band with switchable 10 MHz output and 24/48 V DC BUC power (on the L-band only),
ordering nr. OU-06.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 33/367

Block Diagram MDM6000 Satellite Modem

9.6 Demodulator

The demodulator receives the RF signal on L-BAND Rx A, L-BAND Rx B or IF Rx.

Also make sure that the Symbol Rate and Roll-off Factor matches with the values set on the
modulator site. When these values do not match, the demodulator cannot lock, in this case an alarm
Rx-LOCK is raised.
The demodulator is capable of receiving DVB-S2 (by default) and DVB-S2X or S2 Extensions (when
the hardware/software ordering nr. DH-02 is installed on the device).
The active Rx interface provides DC power and frequency band selection signals compatible with
most professional and commercial LNBs.
After demodulation the baseband frames are forwarded towards the "BBF over IP out" block or to
the "Decapsulation" block.

9.6.1 L-band RX A / L-band RX B Input Interfaces

The carrier arriving from the satellite is taken in on one of the RF interfaces (Demod L-BAND Rx A/
L-BAND Rx B or IF Rx).

The input selection is done in the relevant demodulator functional block of the MDM6000.

MDM6000 >> Demodulator >> Input Selection

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 34/367

Block Diagram MDM6000 Satellite Modem

9.7 BBF over IP Out

The BBF over IP output functional block adds an IP header to the BBFs and then transmit the data
towards the NOP1760.

The following figure shows that this block adds an IP header to the BBFs.

The following figure shows the example of the BBF End Points using Unicast.

The following figure shows the example of the BBF End Points using Multicast.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 35/367

Block Diagram MDM6000 Satellite Modem

9.8 Decapsulation

The decapsulator, decapsulates the incoming BBFs. It strips of the BBF header and retrieves the
original IP traffic. According to the settings in the decapsulator the IP traffic is forwarded towards the
next equipment in the system setup.
To have the communication set up correctly the decapsulator must filter on the correct ISI.
Next to the ISI the incoming channel name(s) must be defined correctly along with its label and label
filter if they are used.
For more information please refer to section: Stream Decapsulation on page 257.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 36/367

Getting Started MDM6000 Satellite Modem

10 Getting Started
Use this guide to configure the management IP Address of the device and save it as a boot
configuration. Once this is done, it is possible to access the device using one of the following
operational interfaces:
• GUI
• CLI
• SNMP

Refer to the reference manual to check the factory default values of the device.

Please also refer to the Configuration Guidelines for a point to point setup between
two MDM6000 devices.

The manual can be found on the CD-ROM delivered together with the device.

10.1 Set the Management IP Address

The factory default of the Mgmt IP Address is: 10.0.0.1/24 on Mgmt1 Ethernet
interface.

» Insert the power cable to start the device.

» Wait until the welcome menu disappeared and the menu tree is displayed on the front panel.

» Select Mgmt Itf using the corresponding Soft Button.

» Navigate to IP Address.

» Press OK (to unfold the branch).

» Navigate to Mgmt1.

» Press OK.

» Press OK to select the IP Address/Prefix.

» Use the Soft Buttons to enter a new IP Address/Prefix.

» Press OK to confirm and save the setting.

» Connect an Ethernet cable between the Mgmt1 port on the back panel of the MDM6000 and the
management PC. (The state indication on the front panel is changed from off to on).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 37/367

Getting Started MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Note that only device specific parameter settings are automatically saved.
All other parameters require an explicit save action!
To get an overview of the device specific parameters we refer to section
Configuration File on page 104 .

Make sure that the management PC has access to this IP address or it belongs to this
IP range.
If needed it is possible to configure the Mgmt Gateway.
To configure the Mgmt Gateway

» Navigate to Mgmt Itf

» Navigate to Gateway

» Enter the correct Gateway address

» Click OK

Now it is possible to access the device from a management PC.

10.2 Set Date and Time

It is advised to set the device date and time according to your time zone.

» Select Device from the corresponding soft button.

» Navigate to Date and Time.

» Press OK (to unfold the branch).

» Navigate to Date or Time and press OK.

» Use the navigation down button to display numerical values.

» Use the Soft Buttons to enter a new Date or Time.

» Press OK to confirm the setting.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 38/367

Getting Started MDM6000 Satellite Modem

10.3 Configure and Save

You can configure settings using the front panel, the graphical user interface (GUI) or the command
line interface (CLI).

Please save to fix your configured settings.

To save settings via the front panel:

» Use the Soft Button Arrow and navigate to the right of the root menu pane and select Actions.

» Navigate to Device Configuration Save and press OK.

» Select the configuration file name and press OK to save the configuration.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 39/367

Quick Configuration Templates MDM6000 Satellite Modem

11 Quick Configuration Templates

These Quick Configuration templates help you to configure the device and get it operational with only a few
manipulations.
The Graphical User Interface offers a powerful means to define the setup configuration.
To allow a quick setup "out-of-the-box", we already defined a set of configuration templates covering the major
use cases. You only need to configure a few parameters to get the device working.

• * Step 1: Install the device and define its MGMT IP address (see Quick Start Guide).
• * Step 2: Log in as operator (top right of the GUI)
(Default login/password is: operator/operatoroperator).
• * Step 3: Load the corresponding configuration template.
Each template configures the device for a point to point setup between two devices.

Templates can be modified and saved as a device configuration for later use.

TX is disabled by default in the templates, this to avoid transmission on an undesired

frequency.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 40/367

Quick Configuration Templates MDM6000 Satellite Modem

11.1 Layer 2 Point to Point

Load these templates (Hub and Remote) to make a back to back connection between two MDM6000
devices.
The following figure provides an overview of the system setup and the basic settings of the two
devices.

• On the hub site load the template "P2P L2 Hub"

• On the remote site load the template "P2P L2 Remote"
• Change the mentioned settings according to the system setup to get your point to point setup up
and running.
• Enable transmit on both modems.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 41/367

Quick Configuration Templates MDM6000 Satellite Modem

11.2 Layer 2 Point to Point ACM Enabled

Load these templates (Hub and Remote to make a back to back connection between two MDM6000
devices with FlexACM enabled.
The templates are configured so that the ACM messaging is performed via the control plane
between the two MDM6000 devices. This means that both devices have their terminal ID defined
and enabled.

• On the hub site load the template "P2P L2 Hub ACM"

• On the remote site load the template "P2P L2 Remote ACM"

Make sure to select the correct Transponder Operation Mode.

(The list of available MODCODs depends on this setting.)
Navigate to:
Modulator >> Link Optimization >> Transponder Operation Mode

• Change the mentioned settings according to the system setup to get your point to point setup up
and running.
• Enable transmit on both modems.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 42/367

Quick Configuration Templates MDM6000 Satellite Modem

11.3 Layer 2 Point to Point ACM Enabled and In-Band

Management

Load these templates (Hub and Remote to make a back to back connection between two MDM6000
devices with FlexACM enabled.
The templates are configured so that the ACM messaging is performed via the control plane
between the two MDM6000 devices. This means that both devices have their terminal ID defined
and enabled.
Next to this the In-band management feature is configured. Manage the remote devices or other
devices on the remote site over this in-band management "network". The in-band management
network is setup in a layer 3 configuration.
The data traffic is forwarded over a layer 2 network.
• On the hub site load the template "P2P L2 Hub ACM and In-band MGMT"
• On the remote site load the template "P2P L2 Remote ACM and In-band MGMT"

Make sure to select the correct Transponder Operation Mode.

(The list of available MODCODs depends on this setting.)
Navigate to:
Modulator >> Link Optimization >> Transponder Operation Mode

• Change the mentioned settings according to the system setup to get your point to point setup up
and running.
• Enable transmit on both modems.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 43/367

Quick Configuration Templates MDM6000 Satellite Modem

11.4 Layer 3 Point to Point

Load these templates (Hub and Remote) to make a back to back connection between two MDM6000
devices.
The following figure provides an overview of the system setup and the basic settings of the two
devices.

Load these templates (Hub and Remote to make a back to back connection between two MDM6000
devices.
• On the hub site load the template "P2P L3 Hub".
• On the remote site load the template "P2P L3 Remote".
• Change the gateway IP and Data IP address according to your system setup.
• Change the RF settings according to the system setup to get your point to point link up and
running.
• Change, in Encapsulation for Traffic Shaping, the PIR settings.
• Enable transmit on both modems.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 44/367

Quick Configuration Templates MDM6000 Satellite Modem

11.5 Layer 3 Point to Point ACM Enabled

Load these templates (Hub and Remote to make a back to back connection between two MDM6000
devices with FlexACM enabled.
The templates are configured so that the ACM messaging is performed via the control plane
between the two MDM6000 devices. This means that both devices have their terminal ID defined
and enabled.

• On the hub site load the template "P2P L3 Hub ACM".

• On the remote site load the template "P2P L3 Remote ACM".

Make sure to select the correct Transponder Operation Mode.

(The list of available MODCODs depends on this setting.)
Navigate to:
Modulator >> Link Optimization >> Transponder Operation Mode

• Change the mentioned settings according to the system setup to get your point to point link up
and running.
• Change the Encapsulation for Traffic Shaping the PIE according to your link.
• Enable transmit on both modems.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 45/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12 How to Manage the Device

This section shows how the parameters in the device are ordered and managed according to your
needs.
It also describes the different user profiles you can use to login and manage the device.
The device can be managed using one of the following physical interfaces:
• The front panel
• The management Ethernet interfaces, used to work with a GUI (Graphical User Interface),
CLI (Command Line Interface) or SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
• The craft interface is used to work with the CLI

12.1 Management Model / Menu Tree

The device management model is designed as a menu tree and a set of commands. The menu tree
exposes the organization of the parameters in the device while the commands are used to execute
actions other than simply setting or getting a parameter.
The menu tree is built up out of a root, branches, sub branches and leafs/parameters.

The menu trees of the GUI, front panel, CLI and SNMP are similar to one another.
Refer to the reference manual to get a full overview.

In some cases, there is a difference between the location of a parameter in the GUI and a location
via the front panel.
The parameter location is displayed as follows:

MDM6000 >> Branch >> Zero or more Sub Branches >> Leafs

The previous line indicates the following:

» Navigate to branch

» Navigate to Sub Branch (when a sub branch exists)

» Select a leaf/parameter

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 46/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

For example:

MDM6000 >> Device Setup >> Mgmt Interface >> IP >> Mgmt1 IP Address/Prefix

The previous line indicates the following:

» Select Mgmt Interface

» Navigate to IP Address

» Insert a new value for Mgmt1 IP Address/Prefix

The management Model / Menu Tree of the GUI, the frontpanel and the CLI can be consulted in the
reference manual.
The reference manual provides an overview of all available parameters and if the parameters can be
set or consulted by the operator or expert profile.

The reference manual for the GUI can also be consulted from the tasks pane in the
GUI, please refer to section: GUI Pane Description on page 57. on page 57

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 47/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.2 Management Ethernet Interfaces

Management interface 1 (Mgmt1) is activated by default; the other interfaces can be enabled on the
following location in the device.

MDM6000 >> Device Setup >> Mgmt Interface

• Mgmt1 (This the top port on the back panel indicated as Mgmt1)
• Mgmt2 (This the bottom port on the back panel indicated as Mgmt2)
• Mgmt Frontpanel (This is the Ethernet port that is found on the front panel)

Do not disable the active management interface (interfaces) because this makes the
device unreachable.
(The interface can be enabled again using the front panel buttons).

When link redundancy is used, Mgmt1 and Mgmt2 must be enabled and auto
negotiation must be on. To enable link redundancy, refer to
Ethernet Link Redundancy on page 50 .

Statistics

MDM6000 >> Device Setup >> Mgmt Interface >> Statistics

This provides an overview of the amount of traffic that is passing over the different management
Ethernet ports.
The following statistics are displayed:

• Input Bytes • Output Bytes

• Input Packets • Output Packets
• Input Dropped • Output Dropped
• Input Errors • Output Errors

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 48/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.3 Management IP Connectivity

The following figure is an example of a setup:

Note: Before configuring the device make a proper design of the system setup.

To configure the management IP Addresses of the device go to the following location:

MDM6000 >> Device Setup >> Mgmt Interface >> IP Address

• Mgmt Gateway: This is the access point for the management port of the device.
• Mgmt interfaces: Configure at least one Mgmt interface to perform basic management using the
GUI, CLI or SNMP.
– Mgmt1, by default this IP address is: 10.0.0.1/24
– Mgmt2
– Mgmt Frontpanel
– Mgmt, this interface becomes active (visible) when Mgmt Interface Link Redundancy is
enabled.
(Link redundancy, effectively combining Mgmt1 and Mgmt2 into one new virtual interface, the
Mgmt interface by default uses the IP address of Mgmt1.
Double click on Mgmt to change the IP address.)

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 49/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.4 Ethernet Link Redundancy

It is possible to enable link redundancy (also known as bonding) on the management Ethernet
interfaces.
Link redundancy is used to eliminate downtime as much as possible in the system setup.
This increases the reliability of the system.
When link redundancy is enabled, two interfaces will behave as one virtual interface (interface
bonding): only one of the two physical interfaces is active at a time.
When the link state of the active interface goes down (physically broken connection), the other
interface takes over the operation.
Refer to the following figures: Note that the same principle is used for the data interfaces.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 50/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

MDM6000 >> Device Setup >> Mgmt Interface >> IP Address >> Link Redundancy

When link redundancy is activated, the Mgmt interface (bond interface) becomes
active. This Mgmt interface has an IP Address that is used as destination address by
the source.

It is recommended to configure the connected switch/router-ports in portfast mode.

Otherwise a spanning tree protocol event could cause a blocked port towards the
MDM6000.
In a typical Cisco switch configured using rapid spanning tree this is achieved by
setting the ports in portfast mode.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 51/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5 Graphical User Interface

The graphical user interface is a web application that gives remote access to the MDM6000. It allows
the user to:
• Manage the device
• Create or change configurations
• Monitor the status of the MDM6000 through alarms

The GUI is optimized for displays with a screen resolution of 1024 x 768 or higher.

12.5.1 Opening the GUI

Proceed as follows to open the GUI on a computer in the network:

» Open a web browser.

It is advised to use Firefox 10 or Google Chrome as standard browser, but the GUI
can also run on other compatible browsers like Internet Explorer 9, Safari …

» Type the IP address of the device in the address bar of the browser. The default IP address is
10.0.0.1/24.

Make sure that the management PC has access to this IP Address or it belongs to this
IP range. If needed it is possible to configure the Mgmt Gateway.

» Press Enter.
The following graphical user interface is displayed.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 52/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5.2 User Profiles

The three possible user profiles are described in the following sections.

For security reasons it is recommended to change the default passwords of the user
profiles. For more information please refer to section: Change a Password on page 56 .

For detailed information on the access rights of the user profiles refer to the reference
manual that is available on the device. Navigate to the the tasks pane,

» Click Documentation

» Click Reference Manual, the reference manual is opened in a separate browser

tab.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 53/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5.2.1 Guest Profile

The user has read-only access to the typical configuration and monitoring options.

This is the default profile when logging in.

There is no password defined for this profile.

12.5.2.2 Operator Profile

Newtec recommends using this profile when configuring or maintaining a device.

The operator profile is developed in such a way that the user is not overloaded with all possible
parameters. This is done to keep the configuration and maintenance of the device light and easy.
The user has read-write access to the typical configuration and monitoring options.

The default User Name and password for the operator profile is as follows:
• User Name: operator
• Password: operatoroperator

12.5.2.3 Expert Profile

This profile has read-write access to all configuration parameters.

The expert profile can be used to configure specific features where the user needs more
background of the different possibilities.
The default User Name and password for the expert profile is as follows:
• User Name: expert
• Password: expertexpert

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 54/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5.3 Switch User Profile

» Click logged in as guest/operator/expert (The User options window is displayed.)

» Click Switch User to change the user profile. (The Login window is displayed.)

The default User Name and password for the operator profile is as follows:
– User Name: operator
– Password: operatoroperator
The default User Name and password for the expert profile is as follows:
– User Name: expert
– Password: expertexpert

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 55/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5.4 Change a Password

» In the users options window click Change Password.

» Enter the Current Password and then the New Password. Also confirm the new password.

» Click Change Password to confirm the New Password.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 56/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5.5 GUI Pane Description

The following screen displays the general layout of the graphical user interface. The different panes
are numbered clockwise and described in the pane description table.

The following table describes the sections numbered in the previous figure.

Pane Pane name Function

No.

1 Banner The top row of the banner displays the official device description
and type.
The top right row displays the current user profile. (To change
the user profile, refer to Switch User Profile on page 55.)
The bottom left row of the banner is editable and can be used to
assign a unique identifier to the device. Do this by clicking on the
label. (In the previous figure, the label is marked: MDM6000).

This name is also shown in the tab of the web

browser and makes it easier to identify different
devices.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 57/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Pane Pane name Function

No.

2 Alarms list The alarm list displays the alarms generated by the device.
pane Alarms are sorted first by their activity and then by their severity
(from critical alarms to warnings).
• It is possible to filter Active, Memorized or All Alarms.
• Clear the memorized alarms counter.
• View details of the generated alarm (State, History).

3 Function This pane displays by default the overview tab.

controls pane This overview tab provides:
• An overview of the signal flow in the device.
• Basic settings used to perform a configuration.
• By clicking on the icon in the right upper corner of the
functional block, a detailed overview with all parameters of the
functional block opens in a new tab.

4 Status bar The status bar informs on:

• On-going interaction with the device via the status field on the
left.
• Refresh button, the status of the device gets refreshed.
Click the arrow to configure the time interval of refreshing the
status of the device.

5 Tasks pane The tasks pane provides an overview of different tasks that are
possible on following levels:

• Device • ACM Controller

– Configurations – Margin Settings

– Reset.

• Logs • Documentation

– Device Logging – Download the Reference Manual

– ACM Logging – Download the SNMP MIBs

– AUPC Logging

• Toolbox • Equalink 3

– Diagnostics Report – Automated Linear

• Maintenance – Automated Non-Linear

– Software Upgrade – Manual Import

– License Upgrade – Reset Predistortion

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 58/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5.6 Overview Tab

The Overview tab contains a schematic representation of the data flow in the device.
The signal passes different functional blocks and each block contains a function name, basic
settings and counters.
The blocks are connected with arrows that illustrate the data flow.

For more information on the colors used in the GUI please refer to section:
Colors Used in the GUI on page 66.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 59/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Functional Blocks Description

Device Management Displays general information on the status of the device.
• Uptime
• CPU Load

BBF over IP IN Functional block that allows to configure and monitor the incoming
traffic.

Encapsulation Displays the configuration, how the incoming traffic is

encapsulated. This can be split up into the following, traffic
classification, traffic shaping, logical channel definition and then
the actual encapsulation of the shaped traffic.
The following encapsulation protocols are possible:
• BBF Encapsulation
– GSE (Generic Stream Encapsulation)
– XPE (Extended Performance Encapsulation)
• TS Encapsulation
– MPE (Multi Protocol Encapsulation)
– ULE (Ultra Lightweight Encapsulation)

S2 Extensions Displays the configuration, how the RF signal is taken into the
Demodulator device. For example:
• Mode selection, • Symbol Rate
DVB-S2, DVB-S2X or S2
(Demod Hardware option
Extensions
Ordering nr. DH-02)
• Input Frequency • Input Level

DVB Demodulator Displays the configuration, how the RF signal is demodulated.

For example:
• Mode selection, DVB-S2 • Symbol Rate
(Demod Hardware option
Ordering nr. DH-01) • Input Frequency • Input Level

Decapsulation Displays the configuration, how the encapsulated BBFs are

decapsulated.
• Filter ISI • Label Filter

• Label

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 60/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Functional Blocks Description

BBF Over IP OUT Functional block that allows to configure and monitor the
outgoing traffic.

Modulator Displays the configuration information on how the traffic must be

modulated. For example:
• Mode selection, DVB-S2 or S2 Extensions
• Transmit (on/off)
• Output Frequency
• …..

Note that it is possible to control the Transmit

(Off/On) from the overview tab.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 61/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5.7 Detailed View of a Functional Block

Click on the enlarge button in the top right corner of a functional block to view more parameters for
the functional block.
Refer to the following figure:

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 62/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5.8 Tree View

The tree view shows all device parameters arranged in a tree structure consisting of branches, sub
branches and leaves.
The following pane is displayed:

The tree view, divides the function controls pane in to two extra panes, they are called A and B in
the previous figure:

The following table describes the extra panes of the tree view.

Pane Description

A Displays the menu tree structure.

Click on a branch or sub branch to navigate through the device.
The menu tree structure uses the following icons:

• : This is a branch icon; it can contain sub branches or

leaves/configuration parameters.

• : This is a sub branch icon; it contains leaves/configuration

parameters.

B Displays the sub branches or the details on the parameters (leafs) that exist under a
selected branch.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 63/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5.9 Alarms Pane

The Alarms pane shows the alarms generated by the device.
Alarms are sorted first by their activity and then by their severity (from critical alarms to warnings.)

The alarm list pane contains the following information:

Pane Description

A This pane displays the alarms.

It is possible to filter on the following alarm information:
• Active
• Active and Memorized
• All Alarms (this displays the complete overview of all possible alarms)

B This pane displays the details on the selected alarm.

• How many times did the alarm occur since the last clear
• When was the last activation
• When the alarm was cleared for the last time

» Click Clear Counters to clear the number of times an alarm was generated.
(Active alarms can be cleared but remain active, the last clear time is updated).
To perform alarm masking, refer to section: Alarm Handling on page 124 .

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 64/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5.10 Status Bar

The status bar informs on the following:

Cfg saved is red when the active configuration is modified but not saved.
To save the configuration, refer to section: Save a Configuration on page 107 .

The following table describes the available LEDs.

LED LED Description

Color
Test Green The build in PRBS generator is active.

Off The build in PRBS generator is inactive.

Ethernet Green The incoming data signal is valid.

Red Indicates an interface alarm.

Off The incoming data signal is not valid.

Data Green The incoming or outgoing data signal is valid.

Yellow The data interfaces are configured but there is no activity

monitored during the last second.

Off The input and output interfaces are not enabled.

Tx On Green The device is transmitting.

Off The transmission is disabled.

Green The demodulator is fully locked.

Rx Lock
Yellow The demodulator is locked to the incoming carrier.

Red The demodulator cannot lock to the incoming carrier.

Off The demodulator is disabled.

Cfg saved Green Indicates that the active configuration is saved.

Red Indicates that the active configuration is modified but not saved.

Refresh Select the drop-down menu to define the GUI Refresh Time.
When working over a slow/long-delay link (like a satellite link)
slowing down this refresh time could be useful to improve the
responsiveness of the GUI.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 65/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5.11 Colors Used in the GUI

In the schematic overview, colors are used per functional block to provide the status of the device.
The traffic flow is also indicated between the functional blocks by arrows.
The following colors (LEDs) are used:

• Green : The device is working as expected;

• Yellow warning sign :

– Device Management: Device redundancy is active and the device is in standby mode:
Note: Yellow is only used by this functional block.
– Modulator: The build in PRBS generator is active.

• Grey : This functional block is not active in the current configuration.

• Red : An alarm is present on the functional block;

The following colors are used for the process flow arrows:
• Black: Inactive, no data is transported.
• Green: Data is available on this part in the process flow (incoming, outgoing or transfer of data
within the device).
• Red: A problem exists on this part of the process flow.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 66/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

For example:

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 67/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5.12 Parameters in the GUI

The GUI contains different types of parameter dialogue boxes to configure all parameters.

Dialogue Box Example

Type
Drop-down-list-box

Edit

This pencil icon indicates that it is possible to edit the parameter.

Lock

The lock icon indicates that it is not possible to edit the parameter.

Data field

Check box The check box has two states.

Off

On

Table

Functional group This groups a set of parameters that belong together. The following
figure is an example of specific DVB-S2 settings (Note, this group can be
found under the modulator.)

Reset button

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 68/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Dialogue Box Example

Type
Open Detailed
View
Click this icon to open the detailed view, zooming in on the parameters
of the specific block.

Delete

Click this icon to delete a connection.

Hovering over a parameter shows more details about it.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 69/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5.13 Update or Configure Parameters in a Table

The GUI uses popup windows to update or configure the parameters that belong to a table.

For example:

» Click the pencil icon in front of the parameter row you want to update or configure.
(A new window pops up).

» Select and/or enter all parameters according to the network requirements.

» Click Update to confirm the new settings.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 70/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.5.14 Invalid Values

The GUI does not allow the input of invalid values. While typing a value this value is validated.
The user interface has several features that help to insert valid parameters:
• When typing an invalid value for a parameter, the edges of the parameter field turn red and a tool
tip displays the reason why the value is invalid.
• It is not possible to save values outside the defined ranges for the device.

The following figure shows an example of the behavior of the GUI when you try to enter an invalid
value.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 71/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.6 The Front Panel

This section explains how the devices can be configured using the front panel.
The following figure shows the navigation buttons, indicators and connectors to the front panel.

12.6.1 Navigating Through the Display

The display is divided horizontally into two regions in a matrix:

• Root Menu Pane: Displays the branches of the device.

• Menu Tree Pane: Displays the current location, the sub branches and/or parameters that exist
under the selected branch or sub branch.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 72/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.6.2 Front Panel Buttons Description

The following figure displays the different control buttons of the front panel.

The following table describes the buttons displayed in the previous figure.

Name/Symbol Description

Arrow UP Navigate to the upper item.

Arrow DOWN Navigate to the lower item.

Arrow LEFT Fold an expanded branch or a leaf sub item.

Arrow RIGHT Unfold a collapsed branch.

OK Depending on the position it has the following function:

• Branch: Expand
• Leaf: Open a parameter
• Confirm a new value

ESC • Fold an expanded branch

• Discard a new value

Soft Buttons • Navigate through the root menu (arrows)

• Select a main branch from the root menu

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 73/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.6.3 Root Menu Pane

This pane represents a list of the available branches.
It is presented at the bottom of the display in a horizontal way.
For example the following main menus:
• Device: This menu contains the device level parameters
• Ethernet
• IP
• (De)modulator

A branch is associated with one (or more) soft-button(s). This depends on the size and the position
relative to the soft buttons.
When more than one branch is available the first and last soft button are used as arrows.
Refer to the following figure:

To select or navigate in the root menu it is possible to do one of the following:

» Press the soft button that is associated with the required menu.

» Use these arrows (soft buttons) to navigate to the required menu and press OK (on the
navigation button).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 74/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.6.4 Tree Menu Pane

• The first row of the tree menu indicates the current location in the device.
For example:
MDM6000 > Device> Identification
• A selectable item in the tree menu pane is visualized with a dark background.

The following table describes the icons that are used by the tree menu pane.

Icons Description
Indicates a branch that contains no sub branches. All parameters exist directly
under this branch.
Folded mode.

Unfolded mode.

Indicates an action. (For example: Save).

Scroll bar
Indicates that more than one line exists under this selection.

Indicates a read only parameter.

In this pane, the parameters are listed vertically.

» Navigate through this pane by using the up/down arrow of the navigation buttons.

» Unfold a branch by using the right arrow or pressing OK.

» Fold a branch by using the left arrow or pressing ESC.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 75/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.6.5 Using the USB Port

It is possible to perform a software upgrade, to import a device configuration file or import a license
file.

Log in as expert user to import a license file.

For a software upgrade proceed as follows:

» Insert a USB stick (carrying a installer.bin) into the USB port.

» On the Frontpanel navigate to Actions.

» Click OK (to unfold the branch).

» Navigate to Device Configuration Import.

(The following actions are possible)
– Device Configuration Import
– Device Software Upgrade

» Select Device Software Upgrade.

» Select File Name: The available upgrade files are displayed.

» Click OK.

» Select Reboot to complete the software upgrade.

(Processing is displayed and then the device is rebooted).

Use the same procedure to perform a

• Configuration import, in this case select .xml instead of the installer.bin file.
• License file import, in this case select .ini instead of the installer .bin file.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 76/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.6.6 Example: Change the Access Level

Change the access level/user profile in the front panel.
Proceed as follows:

» Select Device using the corresponding Soft button.

» Navigate to Front panel.

» Click OK (to unfold the branch).

» Navigate to Access Level.

» Click OK.

» Navigate to the access level of your choice:

– Read Only
– Operator
– Expert

» Click OK.

or

» Select the .Number (Soft button) corresponding to the displayed access levels.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 77/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.6.7 Example: Set the Input Frequency

» Select Demodulator using the corresponding Soft button.

» Navigate to Input Frequency.

» Click OK.

New value is displayed, indicating the current position by a blinking number.

» Insert the new value using the corresponding Soft Buttons.

» Click OK.

» The new value is displayed on the front panel.

12.6.8 Example: Set the Output Frequency

» Select Modulator using the corresponding Soft Button.

» Navigate to Output Frequency.

» Click OK.

New value is displayed, indicating the current position by a blinking number.

» Insert the new value using the corresponding Soft Buttons.

» Click OK.

» The new value is displayed on the front panel.

12.6.9 Example: Check the Alarms

» Select Alarms using the corresponding Soft Button.
(Use the soft button arrows to navigate through the root menu.)

» Navigate to Active Alarms or Memorized Alarms.

» Click OK.

» Navigate through the tree menu to see the active or memorized alarms.

It is possible to clear the Memorized Alarms by pressing the OK button during three
seconds.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 78/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.7 Command Line Interface (CLI)

This section describes how the device can be managed using the CLI.
The commands and how they can be applied are described in the following section.

12.7.1 How to Access the CLI

Access the CLI via an Ethernet management interface or via the craft interface by using a RS232
serial cable.

Management Interface
To access the CLI via the management interface do the following:

» Configure the IP address of the management interface using the front panel.

Make sure that the IP address of the MDM6000 Satellite Modem is in the same range
as the IP address of the managing device or that a default gateway is configured.

» Make an Ethernet connection between the managing device and the MDM6000.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 79/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Craft Interface
To access the CLI via the craft interface do the following:

» Configure the line settings of the serial port as follows:

• Speed 115200 baud
• Eight data bits
• No parity bit
• One stop bit

» Make a connection between the managing device and the MDM6000 Satellite Modem.
For more information please refer to section:  Craft Interface on page 25 .

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 80/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.7.2 Open the CLI using a Terminal Emulator

A terminal emulator is an application that can act as a client for the SSH (Secure Shell) computing
protocol and as a serial console client. In this user manual PuTTY is used as terminal emulator.
Go to the following website http://www.putty.org/ to find the download page for PuTTY.
When opening PuTTY the following window is displayed.

» Insert the Management IP address of the device.

By default 10.0.0.1/24.

» Click Open. The Login Screen is displayed.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 81/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.7.3 Log In as Expert

The CLI interface can only be accessed by the expert user.

» To login as expert type the following:

» login as: expert

» password: expertexpert

» The following window is displayed:

The device name is displayed between brackets.

12.7.4 Show, Help and Context Sensitive Help

These commands make it possible to request information on certain commands or parameters.

12.7.4.1 Show

The show command is used to display the different commands, branches or leaves that exist in a
branch.

For Example:
[MDM6000] device# show
log/
diagnostics/
identification/
frontpanel/
snmp/
cli/
gui/
ftp/
datetime/
monitor/
configuration/
reset*
softwareupgrade*
license/

or

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 82/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

[MDM6000] modulator# show

transmitctrl/

equalink/

dvbs2acm/

prbsgenerator/

mode Dvbs2
transmit on
outputfrequency 1550.000000 MHz
outputband lBand

.... ....

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 83/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.7.4.2 Help

The help command is used to provide information on a command or parameter.

Always type help at the end.

For example:
[MDM6000] device # reset help
reset the device
Mandatory parameters:
* {enum}: Reset (default value = software) (possible enums are: hardware
software factory )

12.7.4.3 Context Sensitive Help "?"

This is used to provide possible completions.

When context sensitive help is used in a branch it displays all the possible commands, sub
branches, parameters and possible values.
Context sensitive help provides all possible completions when typing a command.

The question mark (?) is not shown in the interface.

The (?) can be replaced by pressing two times the TAB key.

For example display possible parameters:

[MDM6000] modulator# o?
outputfrequency
outputband
occupiedbandwidth
outputlevel

For example display possible values:

[MDM6000] modulator# rolloff set ?

set RollOff
Mandatory parameters:
* {enum}: Transmit filter roll-off factor. (default value = rolloff15) (possible
enums are: rolloff5 rolloff10 rolloff15 rolloff20 rolloff25 rolloff35 )

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 84/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.7.5 Navigate Through the Branches of the Device

Use the following commands to navigate through the different branches of the device.

In this manual the commands are presented as follows:

The input message is displayed as follows:
Command input

The return message is displayed as follows:

Command output

12.7.6 Go Into a Branch

» Type in the branch name and press Enter.

For Example:
[MDM6000] # modulator
[MDM6000] modulator#

12.7.7 Move Up One Level

» Type one of the following commands:
exit

or

» ..

For Example:
[MDM6000] modulator# exit
[MDM6000] #
or
[MDM6000] modulator#..
[MDM6000] #

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 85/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.7.8 Return to the Main Branch

» Type one of the following commands: exitall/[ CTRL-Z] (key combination)

For Example:

[MDM6000] modulator prbsgenerator# exitall

[MDM6000]#
or
[MDM6000] modulator prbsgenerator# /
[MDM6000]#
or
[MDM6000] modulator dvbs2# [CTRL-Z]
[MDM6000]#

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 86/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.7.9 Supported Key Presses in the CLI

The CLI supports the following input characters:

Directly from the keyboard

• All printable characters • Delete

• Arrows • Tab: used to perform command completion
• Enter • "?": used to get help on the current input
context
• Backspace
• Double Tab: this has the same function as
the previous command "?"

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 87/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Key Combinations

Key Combination Description

CTRL+A Go to beginning of the line.

CTRL+B Move the cursor backwards.

CTRL+C Flush the current line ignoring the contents and start a new
line.

CTRL+D Delete to the right.

CTRL+E Move the cursor to the end of the line.

CTRL+F Move the cursor forward.

CTRL+H Delete to the left.

CTRL+K Delete from the current cursor position to the end of line.

CTRL+P Recall the previous line in history.

CTRL+M Carriage return.

CTRL+N Go to the next line in history.

CTRL+U Delete from the current cursor position to the beginning of the
line.

CTRL+S Suspend asynchronous tracing, use this to pause the

information stream.

CTRL+Q Resume asynchronous tracing, use this to resume the

information stream.

CTRL+Z Return to the main branch.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 88/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.7.10 Displayed Units

Some variables are by default scaled to a more readable unit.
For example:
• Symbol rate in Mbaud
• Bit rate in Mbps
• Frequencies in MHz

When entering a new value (without specifying a scale) the default unit scaling is
applied.

For example:

[MDM6000] modulator# set outputfrequency=1550

OK

[MDM6000] modulator# outputfrequency get

1550 MHz

12.7.11 Get and Set Parameter Values

Use these commands to read out and set parameter values.

It is not mandatory to navigate to the specific branch to execute a command. It is

possible to request or set a value from the main branch.
From a sub branch it is possible to get/set a value from another sub branch. Do this
by entering a prefix "/" to indicate that the navigation starts from the main branch.

Get

» Type the location and the parameter name to readout the requested parameter value.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 89/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

[MDM6000] # device identification label get

Modulator

or
It is also possible to navigate to the parameter location and make a request.
[MDM6000] # mgmtintf
[MDM6000] mgmtintf # mgmtgateway get
192.168.254.206
or
Request a parameter from another sub branch.

[MDM6000]# /modulator mode get

Dvbs2

Set
For example (change only one parameter):
[MDM6000] modulator# outputlevel set -15dbm
OK

For example (change multiple parameters):

[MDM6000] modulator# set outputlevel=-25dbm outputfrequency=1550.000000 MHz

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 90/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.7.12 Software Upgrade (CLI)

Make sure that the upgrade file (installer.bin) is uploaded to your MDM6000.
To do this use the FTP to upload the installer.bin file. Please refer to:
FTP (File Transfer Protocol). on page 96

When the upgrade file is available use the CLI to perform the software upgrade.

» Login as expert
MDM6000]# device
MDM6000 device]# softwareupgrade filename=installer_MDM6000_1.3.bin reboot=yes
***hardware reset requested***
OK

Make sure that to use the correct filename, the previous is just an example!

12.7.13 Dynamic Tables

The data model of the MDM6000 Satellite Modem uses a lot of tables. These tables are used to keep
related information together.
The CLI allows to display these tables. Furthermore it is possible to access and change values of a
parameter in a specific row and column, this makes the tables dynamic.
The command "showtable" displays the entire table including column headers.
The following figure shows the layout of a table in the CLI.

Make sure that the resolution of the display is wide enough. When this is not the case
the column indication becomes unclear.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 91/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.7.13.1 Show Tables

Use the following command to show a table in the CLI.

"showtable"

For example:
MDM6000 Mgmt interface link# showtable

12.7.13.2 Change Parameters in a Table

To access or change a specific row, type its row key and enter or specify the parameter you want to
access or change.

For example:

MDM6000 datainterface link# showtable

MDM6000 datainterface link# data2 set enable=on

OK

12.7.13.3 Add a New Row to a Table

In case of empty tables, the command showtable only shows the column headers.
This indicates the different parameters that can be defined for a row in this table.
To create a new row , use the command "new".

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 92/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

For example:
MDM6000 gsedecapsulation channels# showtable

MDM6000 gsedecapsulation channels# new Senegal

OK

MDM6000 gsedecapsulation channels# showtable

MDM6000 gsedecapsulation channels# senegal set enable=on

MDM6000 gsedecapsulation channels# senegal set isi=3

12.7.13.4 Delete a Row from a Table

Use the command "delete " to remove a row from the table.

For Example:
MDM6000 gsedecapsulation channels# delete senegal
OK

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 93/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.8 SNMP
SNMPv2c is used in the device. The MIBs as supported by the device can be
downloaded from the GUI Device Tasks Pane.

MDM6000 >> Device Setup >> Access Control >> SNMP

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used when the customer wants to control the
device (or a complete system) through a NMS (Network Management System).
The following parameters must be set:
• Authentication (SNMP Communities)
An SNMP community is a relationship between an SNMP managed device and a set of SNMP
managers that defines authentication, access control, and proxy characteristics. The community
must be set on the local device/managed device. The NMS must include the correct community
string in its messages in order to get or set the different parameters of the device.
Define the following communities:
– Read Only Community: This string is always sent along with each SNMP Get action. The
received string must be recognized by the managed device in order to allow or deny access
to the device.
– Read Write Community: This string must be sent along with each SNMP Set action. The
string must be recognized by the device before a parameter can be set.
• Notification.
– Set the destination IP address where SNMP traps must be sent to. SNMP traps are
messages indicating a specific state of the device.
– Also a trap community must be configured for each trap destination.

The SNMP service is activated by default.

It is recommended to disable the SNMP service when the service is not used to
manage the device. Do this to avoid unauthorized people accessing the device.

For more information on the use of the SNMP interface refer to the System
Integration Guide.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 94/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.8.1 Consult the SNMP MIBs

The SNMP MIBs can be downloaded using the GUI interface.

» Log in as Expert

» Navigate to the Tasks Pane (GUI)

» Click Documentation

» Click SNMP MIBs

A mibs.zip file is downloaded and stored on the default folder of the management device.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 95/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

12.9 File Transfer Protocol (FTP)

This feature is used to download or upload files and is commonly used in combination with the CLI.
For example:
• Download files: (Diagnostics reports, Log files)
• Upload files: (Config files, software upgrades, license file, Equalink 3 pre-correction files).
Enable or disable the FTP (File Transfer Protocol) server service and the FTP account on following
location:

MDM6000 >> Device Setup >> Access Control >> FTP

The FTP service (anonymous account) is activated by default.

For security reasons, it is advised to disable the anonymous FTP-account.
When this is done the FTP account can be consulted with the operator and expert
user login and password.

Use an FTP client application to connect to the device.

An example of such an application is FileZilla.

Downloaded or uploaded files can be consulted on the "Remote Site" in the download/upload
folders.

For security reasons, in order to avoid that the device will be used as a file server,
updated files cannot be downloaded again.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 96/367

How to Manage the Device MDM6000 Satellite Modem

For example:

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 97/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13 General Device Settings and Actions

13.1 Access Control

Before implementing the device into a network it is recommended to consider which management
channels need to be enabled.

It is recommended to disable unused services to prevent unauthorized access to the

device. By default SNMP, CLI and FTP are enabled.

Login as expert user and navigate to the following locations to enable or disable these settings.

MDM6000 >> Device Setup>> Access Control >> SNMP

MDM6000 >> Device Setup>> Access Control >> CLI

MDM6000 >> Device Setup>> Access Control >> FTP

MDM6000 >> Device Setup>> Access Control >> Frontpanel

Once the frontpanel is put into read-only mode it can only be changed back to
read-write mode via one of the other available interfaces.
For example via the craft interface by using the CLI.
(This is the backdoor when the management IP address has changed and the device
is unreachable through IP connectivity).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 98/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.2 License File

A license file contains the information about all the features/options that are enabled or disabled on
the device.

A license file is device dependent.

When the license file is not valid, the device has limited functions.
The only possible actions are configuring the management interfaces and updating the
license.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 99/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.2.1 License Upgrade

Importing a license file is done when a new functionality needs to be activated.

Save the "standard" configuration before performing a license upgrade to a temporary

license.
• Please refer to section: Save a Configuration on page 107 .
• Please refer to section: License Type on page 101 for more information on the
possible license types.

» Log in as Expert (Refer to section: Switch User Profile on page 55).

» Navigate to the Tasks Pane.

» Navigate to Maintenance.

» Select License Upgrade.

» Browse to the folder where the new license.ini file is stored.

» Select the licence.ini file and Click Open.

The following message is displayed:

Importing / upgrading a licence file reboots the device!

» Click Upgrade.

» After the upgrade, a message is displayed that the upgrade was performed successfully.

» Verify if the new functionality is active.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 100/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.2.2 License Type

There are four license types available for the device.
• Permanent License
• Fractional license with an operational time span (time credit)
• Fractional license with an operational time span (time credit),
but only consumed when the device is the active one in a redundancy setup.

Location

MDM6000 >> Device Setup >> Identification

or via the detailed view of the device management block.

13.2.2.1 Permanent License

This license type is the most common type and contains the "feature" set that is ordered.
The license is fixed and can only be updated after ordering a new license.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 101/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.2.2.2 Fractional Licenses

A temporary license allows customers to test and evaluate "new" features.

A temporary license is always activated on device level and not on feature level.

An Expire Alarm is triggered 15 days (remaining time) before the license effectively
expires!

For example, a customer requests a temporary license to test bandwidth cancellation.

When this request is granted, the customer receives one of the following temporary license files.

Fractional License with an Operational Time Span

• In this case it is possible to test with the bandwidth cancellation settings during this trail period.
• The countdown is triggered when the device is active.

Fractional License with an Operational Time Span on a Redundant Device.

• The countdown is triggered when the device is the master in the redundancy setup.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 102/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.3 Configuration Settings

» Log in as Operator or Expert (Refer to section: Switch User Profile on page 55)

» Navigate to the Tasks Pane

» Click Device

» Click Configurations

From this menu it is possible to manage the configurations of the device.

Use the menu to perform the following tasks:

• Save the current configuration • Export a configuration

• Load a configuration • Delete a configuration
• Import a configuration • Make a configuration.bootable

From the front panel it is possible to perform the following actions:

• Device Reset
• Device Configuration Load
• Device Configuration Save

MDM6000>>Actions

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 103/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.3.1 Configuration File

There are two kinds of configuration sets stored on the device:
• Configuration files with device specific parameters.
• Configuration files with application specific parameters.
Device Specific Parameters
These parameters are used to set up device specific settings and they are excluded from the
imported/exported configuration files.
These parameters are automatically saved. This is done to avoid losing connectivity with the device
after loading a new configuration file or after a redundancy switch-over. The device specific
parameters are:
– Mgmt Gateway IP Address
– Mgmt Interface IP Addresses
– Data Interface IP Addresses (the virtual IP Addresses not included)
– Device Identification Label
– Link Redundancy priority (None, Mgmt1 or Mgmt2, Mgmt1 before Mgmt2, …);
– Device Redundancy state (Enable, Initial State, Operational State)

The device specific parameters cannot be consulted or exported to an XML file.

Application Specific Parameters

These parameters are specific for the application settings.
All these settings are stored in an XML file. The following figure is an extract of such an XML file.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 104/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The XML or configuration file provides the possibility to import or export the device application
specific parameters. This configuration file can be useful as a back-up file, to debug or configure the
device offline.
It is possible to store up to 48 different configuration files. These files can be imported and exported.
To view or download a configuration file, refer to section: Export a Configuration on page 110 .

Configurations can be reused among devices where the same licenses are applicable.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 105/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.3.2 Active Configuration

The active configuration is the configuration that is currently used on the device.

The active configuration is not necessarily a configuration that is saved on the device.
When a configuration is completed, it is recommended to save this configuration onto
the device.

Check the LED Cfg saved in the status bar to see if the active configuration is currently saved or
not.

13.3.3 Saved Configuration

A saved configuration is a configuration that can be recalled at any time by an operator to modify the
device behavior according to pre-defined settings.
For example: perform tests or prepare a migration of the device settings.

» Navigate to the Tasks Pane (GUI) to check the available configurations.

» Click Device.

» Click Configurations. The available configurations are listed.

The active configuration is indicated in bold.
The boot configuration is a loaded on the device during a reboot. (The boot configuration is
recognized by a BOOT-flag)

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 106/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.3.4 Save a Configuration

When parameters are changed, they are not directly saved into the active configuration.

» Navigate to the Tasks Pane to check the available configurations.

» Click Device.

» Click Configurations.

» Click Save…

» Enter a Name or select a configuration using the drop down list.

Use this menu to Save the current configuration.
Saving the current configuration makes it the default configuration.
This does not mean that it becomes the boot configuration.

By default, the selected configuration is overwritten upon saving. Enter a name to

save the configuration under a new configuration file.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 107/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.3.5 Import a Configuration

Import a configuration file that can be used as a new configuration.

» Navigate to the Tasks Pane to check the available configurations.

» Click Device.

» Click Configurations.

» Click Import.

» Browse to the correct folder and select the correct config.xml file.

Please note that after an import of a configuration, the configuration is not loaded automatically.
This requires an additional load step, refer to Load a Configuration on page 109.

The configuration file must comply with the available configuration options and
activated licences on the device.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 108/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.3.6 Load a Configuration

Use this procedure to load a configuration file that is available in the configuration list.
The loaded configuration becomes the active configuration.

» Navigate to the Tasks Pane to check the available configurations.

» Click Device.

» Click Configurations.

» Click the Config Name you want to load.

» Click the following icon .

» Click Load Config…

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 109/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.3.7 Export a Configuration

Use this to export a configuration file.
Depending on the management interface GUI or CLI the following is done:
– GUI: The file is downloaded by the browser.
– CLI: The file is available on the FTP server.

» Navigate to the Tasks Pane.

» Click Device.

» Click Configurations.

» Click the in front of the Config Name you want Export.

» Click Export to export the XML file to a default folder (GUI) or to the FTP server (CLI).

The exported file can be:

• Used as a backup file.
• Edited offline and reused on another device.
– In this case, make sure that the configured options and activated licences are
the same on both devices.
• Forwarded upon request to the support engineer for debugging technical problems.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 110/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.3.8 Delete a Configuration

Delete a configuration file from the device when it becomes obsolete.

» Navigate to the Tasks Pane.

» Click Device.

» Click Configurations.

» Click the Config Name you want delete.

» Click the following icon .

» Click Delete…

Deleting a boot configuration causes a factory reset of this boot configuration!

All application specific parameters are reset to their default values.
Traffic can be impacted.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 111/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.3.9 Make a Configuration File Bootable

» Navigate to the Tasks Pane.

» Click Device.

» Click Configurations.

» Click the following icon .

» Click the Config Name you want make the boot configuration.

» Click Make Boot to make the selected configuration the boot configuration.
– The boot configuration is indicated as BOOT.

A boot configuration is used to set all parameters to their correct value at boot time.
This implies that the management parameters (for example redundancy settings),
Input / Output parameters are set according to the network requirements.

Once you have configured the device it is recommended to save the configuration and
make the configuration bootable.
This is mandatory in order to keep the configuration after a power interruption.
Refer to section: Save a Configuration on page 107 .

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 112/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.4 Software Upgrade

A software upgrade is needed in two cases:
• To provide bug fixes and/or software enhancements.
• To activate a new functionality in the device.
The upgrade procedure is explained on the next page.

This activation/upgrade can require a license update as well. Refer to section:

Licence File on page 99 .

Depending on the ordered Care Pack the customer will be informed when a new
software release is available. For more information on the Care Pack please refer to
section:Care Packs .

13.4.1 Software Upgrade Procedure

Use the applicable software upgrade file (installer.bin).
Proceed as follows to perform a software upgrade:

» Log in as operator or expert.

» Navigate to the Tasks Pane.

» Click Maintenance.

» Click Software Upgrade....

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 113/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The following window opens:

» Browse to the folder where the "installer.bin file" is stored.

» Select the file and click Open.

The following message is displayed:

Software Upgrade:
This operation will reboot your device!
Are you sure, you want to upgrade the device firmware with the content of
"installer.bin"?

» Click Upgrade.
Refresh the browser after about 40 seconds.

To perform a software upgrade using the CLI please refer to section:

Software Upgrade

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 114/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.5 Device Identification

MDM6000 >Device >> Identification

This menu provides an overview of the general device identification. Use this part to:
• Enter a logical device label for easy recognition of the device in a system setup;
• Look up the following:

• Label • Device Description

• Serial number • Type ID
• Unique ID • Hardware Revision
• Product • Software ID
• Type ID • Software Version

• Device options (displays the sales code and

the code description) this displays the
current options of the device

13.6 Logging

MDM6000 >Device Setup >> Logging

Enable or disable logging.

Logging can be performed on the following levels:
• Local device logging.
Log files can be exported or cleared, refer to Export or Clear Logging on page 117 .
• Remote logging using a remote syslog server. Syslog is a standardized mechanism for logging in
computer systems.

When remote logging is enabled and a remote IP address is inserted all logging information is
forwarded to this address. The logging messages are packed in UDP (User Datagram Protocol) and
sent to a specific UDP port (514 according to the syslog standard).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 115/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.6.1 Syslog Filter

It is possible to assign up to nine different log levels to the following facilities.

Facility Log Description

Alarms An alarm is detected on the device.

Configuration Configuration changes on the device.

System System changes on the device.

Internal error An internal error is detected on the device.

Authentication User logged in.

Networking Everything related to network interfaces.

Facility Overview of the Log File

The default log level is hard coded. The lower the filter level, the more entries appear
in the log file which may adversely impact the performance of the device.

Level Description
Emergency The system is unusable.

Alert Action must be taken immediately.

Error Critical conditions.

Warn Normal but significant condition.

Notice Notification messages.

Info Informational messages.

Debug Debug level messages.

Trace Debug level messages.

Off No logging is performed.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 116/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.6.2 Export or Clear Logging

» Navigate to the Tasks Pane.

» Click Logs.

» Click Device Log.

Use this menu to View or Download the local board logging file.
• When a view is requested, the log file is opened in a separate browser.
• When a download is requested, a text file is downloaded.

• When a Clear Device Log is requested, the logging information is removed.

A new log file is started. This can be useful to perform debugging.

13.6.3 Interpretation of a Device Log File

A standard log file looks as follows:
[configuration-INFO][2012-12-16 10:27:53] writeValue
/Root/SystemAlarm/Log/Source=GeneralInterface
[alarms-INFO][2012-12-16 10:27:54] alarm General Interface: OFF

Facility Log Level Time Extra information about the action taken
Stamp
[configuration - INFO] [2012-12-16 writeValue
10:27:53] /Root/SystemAlarm/Log/Source=GeneralInte
rface

[alarms -INFO] [2012-12-16 alarm General Interface: OFF

10:27:54]

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 117/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.7 Diagnostics Report

Use this to get an overview of the complete configuration and get debugging information of the
device. This report can be requested by the Customer Service department to perform debugging on
the device. In case of technical problems, it is advised to let the Customer Service department
analyze this report.
The document can be viewed using the GUI or downloaded as a text file.
Proceed as follows:

» Navigate to the Tasks Pane.

» Click Toolbox.

» Click Diagnostic Report.

» Select one of the following:

– View: Opens the report in a separate browser window;
– Download: Downloads a diagnostics.txt file;
– Download (Debug): This downloads an encrypted diagnostics report file and is only for use
by our the Customer Service department.
The following figure is an extract of a diagnostics report:

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 118/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.8 Date and Time

MDM6000 >> Device Setup >> Date and Time

Navigate to this location to set or check the device date and time.

NTP (Network Time Protocol)

MDM6000 >> Device Setup >> NTP

By default, NTP is disabled.

The NTP protocol is used to synchronize the clocks of different devices over a network. It is based
on the principle of having all machines get as close as possible to the correct UTC time (Coordinated
Universal Time).
Enter the different NTP peer IP Addresses to which must be synchronized.
The MDM6000 Satellite Modem acts as a client and periodically queries the server for a precise UTC
time reference.
It is possible to enter up to four NTP peer IP addresses.

It is recommended to enter more than one NTP peer IP Address to increase the
reliability of the network synchronization.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 119/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

When the NTP peer addresses are inserted, time and date of the MDM6000 are updated with the
received information as soon as the MDM6000 can connect to one of the NTP peer servers.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 120/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.9 Device Monitoring

MDM6000 >> Device Setup >>Monitor

The following device level parameters are monitored.

• Temperature
• Board Power supply
• CPU (Central Processor Unit) load
• Memory usage
• Uptime

13.10 Device Redundancy

Redundancy is very important as a single failure of the MDM6000 affects many services at the same
time.
Reliable operation of the MDM6000 in a satellite network is of key importance. The MDM6000 works
seamlessly together with the Newtec USS0202/USS0212 redundancy switches to provide
best-in-class system uptime.

Refer to the user manual of the USS0202/USS0212 Universal Switching System.

The following figures shows a 1+1 protection scheme built up with the USS0202 switch, one in
normal operation and one in redundant operation.

Normal Operation

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 121/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Redundant Operation

To Enable or Disable device redundancy go to the following location:

MDM6000 >> Redundancy

When device redundancy is enabled, the USS controls the actual operational redundancy state.

By default, device redundancy is disabled.

Initial Redundancy State:

• Standby (default value): This means when the device starts up and redundancy is enabled, the
initial state of the redundancy is standby. Typically:
– The modulator output is disabled.
– No IP Address on the data interface.
• Active.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 122/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.11 Reset the Device

Resetting the device causes data loss on an active link!
When a user wants to perform a reset using the front panel or CLI, no caution
message is displayed!

The device can be reset when needed.

» Navigate to the Tasks Pane.

» Click Device.

» Click Reset.
Different reset types are possible:
• Hardware: Resets the software and the hardware (=reboot).
• Software: Resets the software.
• Configs: Resets the application specific parameters.
For connectivity reasons, the device specific parameters are excluded from this reset. For more
information please refer to section: Configuration File on page 104 .
• Factory: Resets all parameters to their default values.
This action is only possible via the CLI interface.

A factory reset removes all stored configurations.

All IP settings are reset to their default values, meaning that the device may become
unreachable!

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 123/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.12 Alarm Handling

Alarm handling allows you to configure and manage the behavior of the different alarms in the
device.
Meaning that it is possible to
• Mask (hide) alarms.
• Assign alarms to a general interface or general device alarm.
Navigate to the following location to perform alarm handling.

MDM6000 >> Device Setup >> Alarm Handling

List of Alarms
For a comprehensive list of alarms, refer to Appendix - Alarm List on page 297

This function is available via the GUI, CLI and SNMP but not through the front panel:

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 124/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.12.1 Alarm Masking

You can mask individually selected alarms. This means that you can hide alarms.

Be careful when configuring this, as a masked alarm is not recognized anymore by the
MDM6000.
Alarm masking can also impact device redundancy, this because the alarm is not propagated
into a general device or a general interface alarm.
For more information please refer to section: Alarm Configuration on page 126 .

Example on the behavior of a masked alarm.

Eth Data2 Link Failure: Alarm Mask = Off
1. No active alarms are present (normal behavior of the MDM6000);
2. The Ethernet cable of Eth Data2 is removed;
3. The Eth Data2 Link Failure alarm is raised.
– On the front panel the active alarm LED lights up according to the alarm that is present;
– On the overview page of the GUI the Data2 arrow turns red;
– The Alarm Pane shows the following:

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 125/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Eth Data2 Link Failure: Alarm Mask = On

1. No active alarms are present;
2. The Ethernet cable of Eth Data2 is removed;
3. The "Eth Data2 Link Failure" alarm is masked so no alarms are triggered!

13.12.2 Alarm Configuration

The alarm configuration provides the flexibility to define per Alarm, whether or not the alarm is
linked to a General Interface and/or General Device alarm.
This way the customer is able to define whether or not this specific alarm triggers a redundancy
switch over as the redundancy system bases a switch over on one of these two alarms.

Be careful when changing the alarm configuration, as the general interface and general device
alarms, are there to protect your device in critical situations.
For example, the "Temperature alarm", by default generates a general device alarm. The
general device alarm switches off the main functional blocks of the MDM6000, to reduce the
CPU load of the device.
In case the default setting is overruled and the general device alarm is not triggered, the device
can become overheated.

The alarms are still recognized by the MDM6000 meaning that the alarm is displayed in the alarm
pane and that the related functional block/arrow in the GUI changes color (turn red). On the front
panel the active alarm LED lights up according to the alarm that is present.
For example:
We want that the "Eth. Mgmt Itf Link Failure" alarm triggers a General Interface Alarm.
(The reason could be that this alarm must trigger a switchover to a redundant device).
Note that a "Mgmt Itf Failure" by default does not trigger the alarm switches. To change this behavior
you have to assign the "Mgmt Itf Failure" alarm to a General Interface or General Device alarm.
(Whether to choose the General Interface or General Device alarm depends on the configuration of
the USS (Universal Redundancy Switch).

The following figure shows the configuration of the "Eth Mgmt Itf Failure" alarm.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 126/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The next time when the Eth Mgmt Itf Failure alarm is present, a General Interface alarm is triggered.
The following figure shows the alarms pane.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 127/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.12.3 Clear Alarm Counters

Alarm counters as presented in the Alarms Pane on page 64 of the GUI and can be cleared all at
once.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 128/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.13 Control Plane

The control plane is used to provide in-band signaling between the MDM6000 and Newtec
equipment. The advantage of in-band signaling is that it separates the signaling messages from the
management and traffic data. This improves the security and simplifies the system setup.
In practice: In-band signaling is used to send over ACM, AUPC and other signaling messages.

IP en/decapsulation must be present on all sites in the system setup. Otherwise it is

not possible to setup the control plane.

The MDM6000 also allows to manage remote Newtec and third party equipment.
For more information please refer to section: In-band Remote Management. on page 271

The following figure visualizes in-band signaling between two sites.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 129/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

In-band Forward Signaling

In-band signaling messages coming from a controller are IP encapsulated and forwarded over the
satellite link.
The messages arriving on the receiving site are IP decapsulated and routed to the client. The client
interprets the messages and provides an answer.
In-band Return Signaling
The client answers to the messages from the controller. The answer is IP encapsulated and returned
over the satellite link.
The answer is decapsulated and routed to the controller. When needed the device settings are
changed.

For example: FlexACM signaling

Forward Link:

1. The ACM controller broadcasts the ACM system settings.

2. The request is IP encapsulated.
3. This message is forwarded over the satellite link.
4. The request is decapsulated and routed to the ACM Client.
5. The ACM Client interprets this message and provides an answer (For Example: new MODCOD request!!).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 130/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Return Link:

1. The answer is IP encapsulated and returned over the satellite link.

2. The answer is IP decapsulated.
3. The message is routed to the ACM Controller.
4. The ACM Controller interprets the message and changes the MODCOD accordingly (for the corresponding
ACM Client).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 131/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.13.1 Configure the Controle Plane

Navigate to the following location:

MDM6000 Satellite Modem >> Device Setup >> Control Plane

The following table shows the available control plane parameters.

Parameter Value Description

Terminal ID 0 - 65277 The terminal ID of this device.

This ID is used by the receiving site to verify the
origin of the signaling message.
This is important in a point to multipoint system
setup.
For example: When FlexACM is enabled in a
point to multipoint setup, the ACM controller must
be able to identify the terminal ID so the
MODCOD change is performed for the correct
ACM client.

Enable On / Off Activate / deactivate the control plane.

Master IP Refer to the next section: .Master IP on page 132.

13.13.2 Master IP

The master IP address is displayed when the IP encapsulation/decapsulation is

performed on another device.

The master IP is used to establish IP connectivity for in-band signaling between two devices.
Enter (or copy) the management IP address used on the device that performs the IP
encapsulation/decapsulation. The following figure shows the use of the master IP Address.
(Note, that the same IP address is used to setup a vpn tunnel between the two devices.)

Due to the use of vpn tunneling the in-band signaling IP connectivity is completely
separated from the management traffic and data traffic!

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 132/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.13.3 Encapsulator Configuration

Configure the encapsulator parameters that is used to set up the control plane.

Parameter Value Description

Nominal S2 S2 MODCOD Enter a S2 MODCOD that is defined by the

MODCOD Range weakest link of the setup. do this to make sure
that the signaling is transmitted under all
conditions.

Nominal S2 Ext S2 Ext MODCOD Enter a S2 Ext MODCOD that is defined by the
MODCOD Range weakest link of the setup. Do this to make sure
that the signaling is transmitted under all
conditions.

Frame Type Normal/Short Select a corresponding frame type.

Note: When working with S2 Ext MODCOD only
Normal frames are possible.

ISI 63 (Read only)

This is a default ISI value that in combination with
the GSE label is used to avoid conflicts between
existing ISI's or Labels. (Refer to section:
BBF Encapsulation Channels on page 238 .)

Label 3F:FF:FF (read only)

This is a default label value that in combination
with the ISI is used to avoid conflicts between
existing Labels or ISI's. (Refer to section:
Channels on page 238 .)

CIR Range Enter a Committed Information Rate for the

in-band signaling messages.
0 / 10.000 kbps

PIR 0 / 400000 kbps Enter a Peak Information Rate for the in-band
signaling messages.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 133/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.14 Remote Terminals

In this menu you can define the different remote sites that are used in the system setup.
The following figure shows the use of the terminals in a point to multipoint system setup.

Note that the Terminal Id is defined on the terminating device (remote modem).

Note that it is also required to configure the terminal Id on the HUB site of the system
setup. This to setup the return link between the remote sites and the HUB.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 134/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.14.1 Configure the Terminals

Navigate to the following location.

MDM6000 >> Remote Terminals

The following table shows the available "Terminals" parameters.

» Click Add to add a terminal.

» To delete, select a row and click Delete.

Parameter Value Description

Name Enter a logical terminal name.

For example, the name of the city where the remote
device is located.

Note that spaces are not allowed.

Terminal ID Range Enter the identification number of the corresponding

terminal (remote device).
0 - 65277
Make sure that the Terminal ID numbers
used are unique!
Note: The Terminal ID of the remote device
can be found under device identification or
control plane on the remote device itself.
Refer to sections:
device identification on page 115 and
control plane on page 132.

Control IP x.x.x.x The control IP Address is the management IP address of

Address the corresponding remote device.
When the IP address does not match, the "terminal" will
not be active.
Please refer to the previous figure to get an overview.

Admin State On/Off Activate or deactivate the corresponding terminal.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 135/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.14.2 Monitoring
The following terminal parameters are monitored.

Parameter Description

Index This is the identification number of the corresponding terminal.

Terminal Displays the terminal name of the corresponding terminal.

Name

State Displays the current state of the monitoring of this link.

Es/N 0 Displays the Es/N 0 value of the the link between the local device and the
corresponding terminal (remote device).

13.15 Reference Clock

MDM6000 >> Ref Clock

Configure the reference clock.

This reference signal for an outdoor BUC is multiplexed on the L-band Tx or on the 10 MHz REF out
interface of the back panel.
(Note, this 10 MHz REF out is an optional interface.)
A reference clock can be generated internally (default) or slave on an external source.
The internal reference clock is 10 MHz.
The clock reference has the following specifications:

10 MHz Ref Specifications

Internal clock reference Stability ± 2000 ppb over 0 to 70°C
Ageing ± 1000 ppb/year

Very High Stability (optional) Stability ±2x10e-9 over 0°C to 65°C

Ageing: ± 0.5 ppb/day
± 500 ppb/10 year

When an external source is selected (attached to 10 MHz ref In interface), the following frequencies
can be inserted.
1 MHz, 2 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz or 20 MHz.
Select the external clock reference for synchronization with other devices to have a higher stability
than the internal default stability.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 136/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.16 Antenna Control Interface

The antenna control interface uses a TCP/IP protocol to exchange information between an Antenna
Control Unit and the MDM6000 Satellite Modem.
The operator has to define the antenna control parameters in such a way that the pointing, Satellite
polarity skew, polarization and the Local Oscillator conversion are according to the satellite
specifications.
Once the connection is setup, the antenna control interface messages are exchanged between the
MDM6000 Satellite Modem and the antenna control unit.
The following figure shows the setup between the MDM6000 Satellite Modem and the antenna
control unit.

The device implements the full commando set from the OpenAMIP standard v1.6.
No special extensions (Newtec proprietary) where added.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 137/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.16.1 Configuration Table

Open the Device management block or navigate to:

MDM6000 Satellite Modem> Device Setup >> Antenna Control Interface

The following parameters must be completed to setup the configuration.

IP Configuration and activate the antenna control interface.

Parameter Description

Index Indicates the Control IDs of the available antenna connections.

Enable Activate the interface controller.

IP Address Enter the destination IP address, IP address of the antenna control unit.
Make sure that the IP address of the antenna control unit is in the same
range as the MGMT IP address of the MDM6000.

Port Enter the TCP port of the destination IP address.

On what logical port is the antenna control unit listening to exchange control
messages.

Connection Define a connection time out.

Timeout How long is it allowed to indicate that the connection is alive while the
Tolerance TCP/IP connection is already down.
This parameter works in combination with the keep alive interval parameter.
When the keep alive interval is reached and the TCP connection is down, the
controller communication alarm is triggered.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 138/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Configure the antenna pointing configuration parameters.

Contact your satellite operator to fill out the following configuration parameters.

Parameter Description

Satellite Longitude in degrees of the satellite position.

Longitude

Satellite This parameter indicates how much the satellite can drift from its default
Latitude position.
Variance

Satellite Polarity The satellite polarity skew is the angle that the antenna of the satellite is
Skew pointed towards the earth surface.
During pointing it is very important to calculate this value in order to get the
optimum pointing of your antenna.

Rx Polarization Receive polarization:

• Left Handed, this points out that the antenna receives left handed circular
polarization.
• Right Handed: this points out that the antenna receives right handed
circular polarization.
• Vertical polarization, this points out that the antenna receives vertical
polarized frequencies.
• Horizontal polarization, the receiver only listens to horizontal polarized

Short Axis Max The short axis maximum skew becomes relevant in case of a non circular
Skew polarization setup.
If the antenna has a beam shape that is radially symmetric about the bore
sight, this parameter may be ignored. Otherwise, the antenna must use the
current skew as a factor in computing the "Transmission off" or "Transmission
on" status.
When all other parameters permit transmission and this maximum skew is
reached, these parameters are overruled and the transmission is switched off.
When going back below the maximum skew value, the transmission is
switched on again. (note if all other parameters permit transmission.)

Rx LO Check the LNB specifications to insert the correct conversion frequency.

Conversion
Frequency

TX Polarization Receive polarization:

• Left Handed, this points out that the antenna transmits left handed circular
polarization.
• Right Handed: this points out that the antenna transmits right handed
circular polarization.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 139/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description

• Vertical polarization, this points out that the antenna transmits vertical
polarized frequencies.
• Horizontal polarization, the antenna transmits horizontal polarized
frequencies.

TX LO Check the BUC specifications to insert the correct conversion frequency.

Conversion
Frequency

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 140/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.16.2 Monitor the Antenna Control Interface

Use the monitoring table to check the current status of the antenna control interface.

Parameter Description

index Indicates the Control ID of the antenna connection that is being monitored.

Keep Alive Indicates the current keep alive interval that is requested by the listener.
Interval

Antenna This indicates the current functional status of the antenna, the following states
Functional are possible:
Status
• Unknown.
• OK: The antenna is active.
• Failed: The antenna is inactive.

TX Allowed This monitoring parameter indicates if the antenna is allowed to transmit.

Status The following states are possible:
• Unknown.
• On: Transmission is allowed.
• Off: Transmission is not allowed, check if the interface controller is
activated.

Transmitted Indicates how much control messages that are sent towards the antenna
Message control unit.
Counter
This should be incrementing, indicating that the connection between the
antenna control interface and 'the antenna control unit are active.

Received Indicates how much messages coming from the antenna control unit are
Messages received by the antenna control interface.
This should be incrementing, indicating that the connection between the
antenna control interface and antenna control unit are active.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 141/367

General Device Settings and Actions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

13.16.3 Antenna Control Interface Alarm Table

The alarm table provides a clear overview of the current antenna status.

Parameter Description

index Indicates the Control ID of the antenna connection that is being monitored.

Controller Green: The IP communication between the antenna control interface and the
Communication antenna control unit is active.
Red: The IP communication between the antenna control interface and the
antenna control unit is inactive.
• Check the configured destination IP address (IP address of the antenna
control unit.).
• Check cabling between the MDM6000 and the antenna unit.

Antenna Green: The antenna control unit is active.

Functional
Red: The antenna control unit is inactive.
Status
• Check the configuration.
• Check if equipment failure is causing the alarm,
for example:
– Is the antenna control unit powered up?

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 142/367

Data Interfaces MDM6000 Satellite Modem

14 Data Interfaces

14.1 Data Ethernet Interfaces

The data interfaces can be configured on the following location:

MDM6000 >> Data Interface >> Ethernet

• Data1 (This port is the top port on the back panel indicated as Data1).
• Data2 (This port is the bottom port on the back panel indicated as Data2).

When link redundancy is needed, Data1 and Data2 must be enabled and auto
negation must be on. To enable link redundancy, refer to section:
Data Ethernet Link Redundancy on page 149.

Per interface, the following information is displayed.

• Default interface name; (read only) • Advertised Speeds

• Enabled (On/Off) • Forced Speed
• MAC address • Link State
• Auto Negotiation (On/Off) • MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit)
Range: 68 - 9582

Statistics

MDM6000 >> Data Interface >> Statistics

This provides an overview of the traffic that is passing over the different Ethernet ports.
The following statistics are displayed:

• Input Bytes • Output Bytes

• Input Packets • Output Packets
• Input Dropped • Output Dropped
• Input Errors • Output Errors

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 143/367

Data Interfaces MDM6000 Satellite Modem

14.2 Data IP Connectivity

The following figure is an example of a setup:

Use a network drawing to define the data input interfaces:

Make sure that the source device and the MDM6000 belong to the same IP range or the content is
routed to the correct Data IP address.

MDM6000 >> Data Interface >> IP Address

By default, the data IP addresses are 0.0.0.0/24:

• Data Gateway: This is the access point for the data port of the device.
• Data1 (Physical Ethernet interface).
• Data2 (Physical Ethernet interface).
• Data (This IP address is used to perform link redundancy, effectively combining Data1 and Data2
into one new interface).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 144/367

Data Interfaces MDM6000 Satellite Modem

14.2.1 Virtual IP Address

Use virtual IP addresses when working with device redundancy and a USS (Newtec's Universal
Switching System).
The virtual IP addresses are configured on the main device. These are automatically synchronized to
the stand-by (spare) device. The moment the main device goes into alarm the stand-by device
inherits the IP address of the main modem. A gratuitous ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) Reply is
sent to the Ethernet switch in order to update it's MAC table and reroute the traffic to the correct port.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 145/367

Data Interfaces MDM6000 Satellite Modem

MDM6000 >> Data Interface >> IP Address

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 146/367

Data Interfaces MDM6000 Satellite Modem

14.2.2 IGMP Version

Multicasting allows one computer on the Internet to send content to multiple other computers that
have identified themselves as interested in receiving the originating "computer's" content.
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is an Internet protocol that provides a way for an
Internet computer to report its Multicast group membership to adjacent routers.
IGMP registers dynamically individual hosts in a Multicast group on a particular LAN segment.

MDM6000 >> Data Interface >> IP Interface

Configuration

Selection Description

IGMP v2 Provides the basic query response mechanism that allows the Multicast
router to determine which Multicast groups are active and other processes
that enable hosts to join and leave a Multicast group.
Furthermore it provides such capabilities as the IGMP leaves process,
group-specific queries and an explicit maximum response time field.
IGMPv2 also adds the capability for routers to elect the IGMP querier without
dependence on the multicast protocol to perform this task.
Please refer to RFC 2236 document that defines the IGMPv2.

IGMP v3 Provides for source filtering, which enables a Multicast receiver host to signal
to a router which groups it wants to receive Multicast traffic from, and from
which sources this traffic is expected. In addition, IGMPv3 supports the link
local address 224.0.0.22, which is the destination IP address for IGMPv3
membership reports; all IGMPv3-capable Multicast routers must listen to this
address.
Please refer to RFC 3376 document that defines the IGMPv3.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 147/367

Data Interfaces MDM6000 Satellite Modem

14.2.3 Multicast Memberships

When the IP Address type Multicast is selected, the following parameters become available.

Parameter Description

Multicast Address When Multicast is used a specific Multicast address must be defined.
This is the IP address where the different devices in the Multicast group
have to listen to.
IP Multicast uses a reserved range of IP addresses (from 224.0.0.0 to
239.255.255.255). The IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is
used as communication and coordination protocol between source and
recipients.
With IGMPv3 a source address can be detected so that only traffic coming
from this source is accepted.

(Note this is only applicable when the IGMP version 3.0 is selected.)
Source Address A Configure the source address to indicate from which source, data is
expected. This allows the router to forward data from only those sources
&
from which the receivers requested the data.
Source Address B
Source A and Source B allow to configure device redundancy on
Multicast level.

MDM6000 Satellite Modem >> Data Interface >> Multicast Memberships

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 148/367

Data Interfaces MDM6000 Satellite Modem

14.3 Data Ethernet Link Redundancy

It is possible to enable link redundancy (also known as bonding) on the management and data
Ethernet interfaces. Link redundancy is used to eliminate downtime as much as possible in the
system setup. This to increase the reliability of the system.
When Ethernet interface redundancy is enabled, two interfaces behave as one virtual interface (bond
interface): only one of the two physical interfaces is active at a time. When the link state of the active
interface goes down (physically broken connection), the other interface takes over the operation.
Refer to the following figure:

MDM6000 >> Data Interface >> Link Redundancy

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 149/367

Data Interfaces MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Options Descriptions

Data1 or Data2 (Redundant) The bonding interface is active.

There is no preference in priority between the two available
interfaces.

Data1 before Data2 The bonding interface is active.

(Redundant)
Interface Data1 has priority over interface Data2. This
means that when Data1 is available, this will be the active
interface.

Data2 before Data1 The bonding interface is active.

(Redundant)
Interface Data2 has priority over interface Data1. This
means that when Data2 is available, this will be the active
interface.

To configure the bond interface, refer to section: Data IP Connectivity on page 144.

To have bonding working properly make sure to configure the switch/router in such a
way that the spanning tree is not blocking the fast switchover between ports.

In a typical Cisco switch configured using rapid spanning tree this is achieved by
setting the ports in PortFast mode.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 150/367

Data Interfaces MDM6000 Satellite Modem

14.4 BBF over IP In

This block takes care of Baseband Frames (BBFs) received on the data Ethernet port(s) of the
modem.
It is used when an external encapsulator (like NOP1760 is used.

The following figure shows an example of a setup between the NOP and the MDM6000.

Navigate to the following location:

MDM6000 >> BBF over IP

or
via the function control window.
Click on the BBF over IP In, open detailed view.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 151/367

Data Interfaces MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The following window is displayed.

• Enable: reception of BBFs on this data input interface (see next page).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 152/367

Data Interfaces MDM6000 Satellite Modem

BBF Stream Description

Configuration
Name Enter a logical name.

Enable Enable this input.

IP Address Unicast:
Type
Multicast:

Multicast IP Define to what Multicast group the device belongs.

Address

UDP Port Define on what UDP port the BBFs are received.
This is needed when the device belongs to a Multicast group.

BBF Type Define the BBF type that is send by the source (NOP1760 towards this
functional block.
Note: This option is inserted for future development when other BBF-Types
might become available.

Source Enable in case of source redundancy.

Redundancy
The source ID is filtered and displayed in the monitoring info (Source Info).
When for 300 ms no input is detected due to a failure of the source, the
redundant source is selected.

Stream Monitoring

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 153/367

Data Interfaces MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Monitoring Description
Parameter
Input Bit Rate The incoming bit rate in Mbps measured per stream.

Source Info This monitoring parameter provides the actual used input source IP Address
and UDP port.

Input Counter Displays the amount of incoming BBFs.

Output Displays the amount of outgoing BBFs.

Counter

Output Bytes Displays the number of BBF bytes properly transmitted in a stream.

Drop Counter Displays the amount of BBFs dropped because the received modulation type
is not active on the source.

Invalid Frames Displays the amount of Invalid frames.

Overflow Number of BBFs that are dropped for a specific BBF stream because the
Counter input data buffer is full.

Discontinuity When the sequence numbers are not continuous for a certain BBF stream
Count this counter will be incremented.

MODCODs not Displays the amount of BBFs that are dropped because the received
supported MODCOD is not licensed for a specified BBF stream.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 154/367

Data Interfaces MDM6000 Satellite Modem

14.5 BBF over IP Out

The received RF signal is demodulated and put into BBFs.
These BBFs are inserted into the BBF over IP Out functional block. This functional block is the
interface between the MDM6000 and the receiving device (NOP1760). Please refer to the following
figure:

Navigate to the following location to configure the parameters.

MDM6000 >> BBF over IP Out

or via the function control window.

Click on BBF over IP out functional block, open detailed view.

The following window is displayed:

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 155/367

Data Interfaces MDM6000 Satellite Modem

• Enable
Destinations:
• Demod Id (read only)
• Enable: Enable or disable the BBF over IP out to the specified destination IP Address (with
corresponding UDP port)
• Destination IP Address
• Destination UDP Port

Monitoring
Monitoring is performed on this interface to get an overview on the outgoing BBF Bit Rate and of the
BBF frame count.

Parameter Description
Output BBF Bit Rate Displays the outgoing bit rate in Mbps.

BBF In Count Displays the amount of frames that are inserted by the
demodulator.

BBF Out Count Displays the amount of frames that are sent towards the
receiving device.

BBF Drop Count Displays the amount of frames that are dropped.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 156/367

Data Interfaces MDM6000 Satellite Modem

14.6 L-Band Rx A / L-Band Rx B

Configure the demodulator input interfaces on following location.

MDM6000 >> Demodulator 1

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 157/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15 Feature Descriptions

15.1 Modulator
The modulator functional block is used to perform the actual modulation of the incoming BBFs.
Navigate to the following location to view all parameters.

MDM6000 >> Modulator

The main parameters are:

• Modulation Mode: DVB-S2, DVB-S2X, S2 Extensions
(The available modes depend on the ordered options, refer to Options on page 10 .)
• Transmit On/Off
• Output Level
• Output Frequency
• Symbol Rate
All parameters are described in the following sections.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 158/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.1 Modulation Mode

Select the modulation mode DVB-S2, DVB-S2X or S2 Extensions.

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Mode

» DVB-S2

» DVB-S2X (This is a new DVB standard)

» S2 Extension (This is Newtecs proprietary modulation mode)

(To see which modes are available on the device please check the installed device options, refer to
section: Device Identification on page 115).
For more information on the technologies used in the MDM6000, refer to
Appendix - Overview of the Used Technologies on page 305.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 159/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.2 Transmit

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Transmit

This is the modulator output transmission.

Enable transmit when the complete configuration is done according to the system requirements.

A warning is displayed when it is not allowed to change a parameter when transmit is

enabled.
This will be the case with parameters that influence the transmitted signal and its
spectrum.
Please refer to section Transmit Control on page 168 to overrule this default behavior.

Transmit State Reason

The parameter displays why the transmission is on or off. This parameter is valuable when the
transmission is off due to an alarm. It reflects the alarm state's that are configured under transmit
control.

15.1.3 Output Frequency and Output Band

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Output Frequency

Set the output frequency of the modulator. The output frequency must be in-line with the device
capabilities (L-band or IF band) and the system requirements.

Output Frequency
• L-band: 950 MHz to 2150 MHz
• IF-band: 50 MHz to 180 MHz
The device performs a check whether the inserted frequency is within the allowed frequency range.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 160/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.4 Roll-Off Factor and Occupied Bandwidth

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Roll-Off

Select the appropriate roll-off factor.

The possibilities are:
• 35%
• 25%
• 20%
• 15% (Clean Channel Technology)
• 10% (Clean Channel Technology)
• 5% (Clean Channel Technology)

The following figure compares 20% roll-off with 5% roll-off.

By lowering the roll-off factor and accordingly increasing the symbol rate, the throughput can be
increased while maintaining the same occupied (leased) bandwidth.

Clean Channel Technology®

Newtec's Clean Channel Technology® is a combination of improved roll-off factors for DVB-S2 and
advanced filtering technologies to allow optimal carrier spacing. The combination can bring
efficiency gains up to 15%.
Clean channel technology consists out of the following three effects.
A first effect in the Clean Channel Technology is applying a smaller Roll-Off (RO) percentage than
currently used in the DVB-S2 standard. In the DVB-S2 standard the 20% and 25% roll-off factor
percentages are common. Basically this means that these percentages need to be added to the
desired bandwidth over satellite. Reducing these roll-off factors to 5%, 10% or 15% results in a
direct gain in bandwidth. This is reflected in the following formula:
Occupied bandwidth = Symbol Rate*(1 + roll-off factor).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 161/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Multicarrier:
Occupied bandwidth = Symbol Rate*(1 + roll-off factor).

Example for Occupied bandwidth 3 MHz.

• DVB-S (35%) 2.2 Mbaud • DVB-S2 (15%) 2.6 Mbaud

• DVB-S2 (25%) 2.4 Mbaud • DVB-S2 (10%) 2.7 Mbaud
• DVB-S2 (20%) 2.5 Mbaud • DVB-S2 (5%) 2.8 Mbaud

Single Carrier per Transponder:

Two limits are possible:
• Limit1:

Symbol Rate = Transponder Separation / (1 + roll-off Factor)

The minimum roll-off factor that may be selected with this formula is 10%.

• Limit2:
Symbol Rate =User Bandwidth / (1 + roll-off Factor)

For example:
A 36 MHz transponder with 40 MHz Separation.

Roll-Off Limit 1: Limit 2:

Factor (%)
Transponder Separation Based User Bandwidth Based

35 29.6 Mbaud 26,7 Mbaud

25 32 Mbaud 28,8 Mbaud

20 33.3 Mbaud 30,0 Mbaud

15 34.8 Mbaud 31,1 Mbaud

10 36.4 Mbaud 32,7 Mbaud

5 36.4 Mbaud 34,3 Mbaud

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 162/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.5 Spectrum Polarity

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Spectrum Polarity

Spectrum inversion can be enabled in case an inverting upconverter is used. As a general rule
transmissions on satellite need to be non-inverted.

Most modern demodulators can detect and automatically adapt the spectrum
inversion.

15.1.6 Output Level

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Output Level

The output level must be set according to the network requirements.

For L-band the range is between -35/+7 dBm (± 2 dB)
For IF-band the range is between -35/+10 dBm (± 2 dB)
The step size is 0.1dB.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 163/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.7 Clock Output

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Clock Output

Enables or disables the transmission of a 10 MHz clock signal on the L-Band output interface.
For the reference clock settings and characteristics, refer to Reference Clock on page 136.

15.1.8 Carrier Modulation

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Carrier Modulation

This command controls the carrier modulation:

• On (Operational modulated carrier signal)
• Pure Carrier (unmodulated output signal)
• Test modulation (pulse)
• Test modulation (clock/4)
• Test modulation (clock/8)
• Test modulation (clock/16)

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 164/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The pure carrier is used during line-up and to perform cross polarization tests with the
satellite operator.

The test modulation settings are used for calibration and/or verification of the spectrum polarity.
In this case, a carrier is modulated by a rotating vector with a period of baudrate/n. This results in a
single spectral line at:

+clock/n offset from the pure carrier.

The following figure shows the constellation diagram and the result on a frequency analyzer of a
Test modulation clock/8.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 165/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.9 Amplitude Slope Equalizer

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Ampl Slope Equalizer

Configure the amplitude slope equalizer. An amplitude slope in the up-converter or in the high
power amplifier can be compensated by using this equalizer. The equalizer has a maximum range of
± 2 dB/50 MHz.The compensation can be set in the range between -7 and +7.

The slope equalizer can also be used to compensate for cable slope.

15.1.10 Symbol Rate

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Symbol Rate

Define the symbol rate in Mbaud.

15.1.11 Stream Mode

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Stream Mode

Select the appropriate stream mode:

• Single-stream
• Multistream

15.1.12 Measured Packet Count and Measured Bit Rate

The measured packet count should be incrementing.
The measured Bit Rate should match the bit rate inserted by the source device.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 166/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.13 Standby Redundancy State

USS has no control over the connectors on the Modem

(Transmit state, interface state).

The standby redundancy state allows you to overrule the initial device redundancy state.
With this parameter it is possible to reduce the switching delay.
For more information on the initial device redundancy state and where to configure it please refer to
section: Device Redundancy on page 223.
The following figures show the principle.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 167/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.14 Transmit Ctrl

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Transmit Ctrl

The transmission control parameters allows you to alter the default behavior of the transmitter.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 168/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.14.1 Impact of Alarms on the Transmission

Define the impact of the following alarms on the transmission:

• In case of General Device Alarm:
– Disable Transmit (default value)
– No Impact
• In case of General Interface Alarm:
– Disable Transmit (default value)
– No Impact

For the definition of the General Device Alarm and General Interface alarm, refer to
Generic Alarms on page 298.

• In case of Demodulator no-lock Alarm:

– Disable Transmit
– No Impact

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 169/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.14.2 Allow Changes During Transmission

• Allow Changes while Tx is on

– Enable
– Disable (default value)
The following picture displays the default value.

Disabled Enabled

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 170/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.15 Link Optimization

15.1.15.1 Transponder Operation Mode

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Link Optimization

The Transponder Operation Mode configuration defines the satellite configuration of the link and
thereby helps the modulator and demodulator select the right MODCODs (linear or non-linear) and
the appropriate distortion margins and ACM mechanism to be used.

Transponder Operation Description

Mode

Multiple Carrier per Use this setting when the transponder is operated in multiple
Transponder carriers per transponder on the satellite.
The transponder has sufficient backoff and operates in its linear
region.
• MODCOD selection: A valid list of MODCODs is displayed,
including the specific Linear MODCODs.
Non valid MODCODs for this setting are not displayed.

Single Carrier per Use this setting when the transponder has sufficient backoff to be
Transponder – Linear considered in linear mode with a single carrier and that the
operation is clearly within the linear region of the transponder.
• MODCOD selection:A valid list of MODCODs is displayed,
including the specific Linear MODCODs.

Single Carrier per Use this when the satellite is operated in a single carrier per
Transponder – transponder mode in the non-linear amplification region of the
Non-Linear transponder.
• MODCOD selection: A valid list of MODCODs is displayed.
Note that we do not support single carrier per
Transponder - non-linear at data rates below
22 Mbaud.
In this situation please select Multiple Carrier per
Transponder.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 171/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.15.2 Maximum S2 Ext MODCOD

Select the appropriate maximum S2 Ext MODCOD, to get an optimal configuration when non linear
predistortion is enabled in combination with ACM.

15.1.16 External Converter

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> External Convertor

» Select Enable On
When enabled, it is possible to configure the transmit frequency (RF Frequency) in function of the
LO Frequency of the BUC and the output frequency defined on the modulator.
In the following example the output frequency is set to/

Please check the specs of the external converter to determine LO (Local Oscillator)
Frequency.

The following calculations are valid:

Direct Spectrum
RF Frequency = LO Frequency + Output Frequency

Inverted Spectrum
RF Frequency = LO Frequency - Output Frequency

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 172/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.17 Modulation

15.1.17.1 Physical and Baseband Layer Efficiency

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Modulation

Physical Layer Efficiency

The measured physical layer efficiency is equal to the percentage of non-dummy physical layer
frames.

Baseband Layer Efficiency

The measured baseband layer efficiency is equal to the percentage user data inside the baseband
frames.

15.1.17.2 Physical Layer Scrambling

Physical layer scrambling is performed on each physical layer frame (excluding the Physical layer
header) to perform energy dispersal of the modulated signal.

For more information on Physical Layer Scrambling, refer to the DVB-S2 standard:
ETSI EN 302 307.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 173/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.17.2.1 Dummy PL Scrambler Mode

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Modulation >> Dummy PL scrambler mode

When bursty traffic (like IP) is transported, the physical layer can run out of data to transmit. In that
case dummy physical layer frames are transmitted in order to keep the receiver locked.
There are two possible modes to perform scrambling of the dummy physical layer frames.
• DVB-S2 and DVB-S2X Standardized Reset (reinitialized):
In this mode the randomization sequence is reinitialized at the end of each dummy physical layer
frame header.
• Continuous:
In this mode there is no re-initialization at the end of each dummy physical layer frame header.
This is done to achieve more randomness in the dummy physical layer frames (carrier data) as
desirable for bandwidth cancellation. The bandwidth canceller needs randomization in order to
measure the time delay between the transmitted and the returned signal.

This Continuous mode is only valid for the dummy physical layer frames!

The Continuous mode is not DVB compliant.

As a consequence it is possible that some non-Newtec demodulators are not capable
of working with this mode.

15.1.17.2.2 Physical Layer Scrambler Signature

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> PL Scrambler Signature

The following information about the Physical Scrambler Signature is taken from the
DVB-S2 standard. Refer to the following document, ETSI EN 302 307.

In case of broadcasting services, the PL Scrambler Signature = 0 shall be used as default sequence,
this to avoid manual receiver setting or synchronization delays.
The PL Scrambler Signature, assuming values in the range 0 to 262 141, indicates the spreading
sequence number. The use of different PL Scrambling sequences allows a reduction of interference
correlation between different services. For the same purpose, it is possible to reuse a shifted version
of the same sequence in different satellite beams. Furthermore, the PL Scrambler Signature can be
unequivocally associated to each satellite operator, satellite, or transponder, thus permitting
identification of an interfering signal via the PL Scrambling "signature" detection. There is no explicit
signaling method to convey the PL Scrambling signature value to the receiver.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 174/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.1.17.2.3 Roll-Off Signaling

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Roll Off Signaling

• Standard : (2 bits : "10") roll-off signaling value is used for roll-off = 20%
• Reserved : (2 bits: "11") roll-off signaling value is "reserved" (11) is used for roll-off < 20%

Some DVB-S2 receivers can use the received roll-off bits state '11' for selecting a 15% roll-off filter.
In this case, it is favorable to choose the setting "reserved".In all other cases, it is recommended to
use the setting "standard" as this will guarantee compatibility with DVB-S2 receiving equipment.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 175/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.2 DVB Carrier Identification

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> DVB Carrier Identification

The DVB carrier identification standard is used to reduce RFI (Radio Frequency Interference). The
DVB carrier identification allows the satellite operators to identify and contact the source of
interference quickly.
The DVB carrier identification exists of a device unique parameter and device variable parameters.

15.2.1 Device Unique ID

The Global Unique ID is a device unique identifier that is based on the MAC address of the
modulator.

15.2.2 Device Variable Parameters

The device variable parameters can be adjusted by the operator.
The geo coordinates indicates the current position of the modulator.
When "Use Geo Coordinates" is turned On, the latitude and longitude information is added to
carrier ID.
The telephone number makes it easier for satellite operators to contact you in case of emergency. It
is possible to enter the extension number of the department or person that is responsible for the
system configuration.
For example: +323 780 65 00 ext. xxxx. (With xxxx the correct extension number.)

Be aware that ext. is case sensitive.

The user data can be used to enter free text, it is possible to enter up to 24 characters.
For example: Enter the name of the company that is responsible for the uplink.
DVB-CID Format: At this moment only one format exists and by default the parameter setting is 1.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 176/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.2.3 How does it Work?

The DVB carrier identification is transmitted within the uplink RF carrier as a spread spectrum signal
below the the carrier.
The DVB carrier identification information is independent of the payload of the carrier being
identified.

15.2.4 What to do when Interference is Detected?

» Contact your satellite operator.

» The satellite operator has the right equipment to filter out the Carrier ID Information.

» Your satellite operator identifies who is responsible for the interference and takes contact with
the other satellite operator to alert them of the interference.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 177/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.3 Equalink® 3
Predistortion is applicable for a single carrier per transponder scenario.

As shown on the figure above, a satellite payload contains an input multiplexing (IMUX), a traveling
wave tube amplifier (TWTA), and an output multiplexing (OMUX) filter. The IMUX filter selects the
input frequency band of your transponder (which is often a bit wider than your carrier). The TWTA
amplifies your signal. A side effect of this amplification is frequency components generated outside
the initial signal bandwidth.. Therefore, the OMUX filter cuts away unwanted frequencies to avoid
interference in other frequency bands. Because the average power of the signal arriving at the
TWTA varies (e.g. due to rain in the uplink), a pre-gain stage is included in most payloads,
performing automatic level control (ALC) which keeps the drive level of the TWTA constant.

The goal of Newtec's Equalink 3 technology is to achieve the most efficient communication. At first,
efficient communication implies bandwidth efficient communication. To get most out of your
transponder, your carrier bandwidth should approach the bandwidth of the IMUX/OMUX filters.
Because these filters operate at very high frequencies in extreme conditions, imperfections in the
filter response introduce linear distortion into your signal.
Linear Equalink 3 will compensate for this linear distortion so that you can extend your carrier
bandwidth.
Secondly, efficient communication implies power efficient communication. To get most out of your
transponder, your carrier signal should get amplified as much as possible by the TWTA, which is
achieved by increasing the drive level of the TWTA., Equalink 3 can compensate for the Non-Linear
distortion that is introduced by the Non-Linear amplification, so that you can extend the drive level.

Summarizing, Equalink 3 optimizes the satellite link performance by counteracting distortion effects
(linear and non-linear distortion) in a satellite link.

The performance of Equalink 3 depends on many factors (the type of TWTA and its drive level, the
characteristics of the IMUX and OMUX filters, the uplink and downlink noise, the characteristics of
your signal, ...).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 178/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The Automated Equalink 3 calibration procedure is designed to automatically take into account all
these factors to configure Equalink 3 in the best possible way with minimal user interaction.

A detailed document describing the automated Equalink 3 calibration procedure can

be delivered upon request.
Please use the Newtec Service Desk tool to receive more information.
> Browse to https://customersupport.newtec.eu.
> Fill in your Username and Password
> Create a ticket
In response to your request you will receive the document from our support team.
In case you don't have a Username and Password yet for the Newtec Service Desk
tool: request a login to [email protected].

In order to do a complete Equalink 3 calibration, the following procedures are typically performed in
the presented order:
• Satellite Link Analysis (to verify the present conditions, such as the TWTA drive level, and uplink
and downlink noise level).
• Automated Linear Equalink 3 Calibration (run and enable afterwards).
• Automated Non-Linear Equalink 3 Calibration (run and enable afterwards).
• Satellite Link Analysis
(to verify the link optimality and to give an overview of the gain of Equalink 3).

For broadcast or distribution links that are using a single carrier per transponder, both linear and
Non-Linear pre-distortion can give much link margin gain.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 179/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.4 PRBS Generator

The PRBS (Pseudo Random Bit Sequence) generator is used to perform basic tests on the device
or to get an indication on the satellite link quality.
Use the following procedure to activate the PRBS Generator.

MDM6000 >> Test >> PRBS

• Enable
• Bit Rate
• Multi-stream mode: Choose between Multi stream and single stream PRBS generation

Streams
Per stream you can define the following:
• The MODCOD
• The frame type (normal or short frames)
• The use of pilots or not

All MODCOD, frame type and pilot settings defined in the interface part are overruled
when PRBS is enabled.
No data will be decapsulated in the receiving modem. Use the DVB-S2 demod
statistics to observe the correct reception of the carrier.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 180/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.4.1 How to Monitor the Outgoing PRBS Bit Rate

The PRBS bit rate can be measured in the BBF over IP Output functional block.
Note, the decapsulation block does not show a rate because no data is decapsulated.
The PRBS data is dumped by the decapsulator because there is no suitable destination.

Proceed as follows to create a suitable destination:

» Disable GSE decapsulation. (Do this because BBF over IP Out can not work in parallel with the
GSE Decapsulation.)

» In the overview tab, click on the top right icon to open the BBF over IP Out functional block.

» Enable the BBF over IP Output block.

» Enable the Destination.

» Enter the Destination IP Address.

Note: Make sure that the IP Address is within the data network that is configured in the Data
Interface menu.

» Now you should see the measured PRBS Bit Rate in the Output BBF Bit Rate monitoring value.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 181/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.5 Reference Clock

MDM6000 >> Ref Clock

Configure the reference clock.

This reference signal for an outdoor BUC is multiplexed on the L-band Tx or on the 10 MHz REF out
interface of the back panel.
(Note, this 10 MHz REF out is an optional interface.)
A reference clock can be generated internally (default) or slave on an external source.
The internal reference clock is 10 MHz.
The clock reference has the following specifications:

10 MHz Ref Specifications

Internal clock reference Stability ± 2000 ppb over 0 to 70°C
Ageing ± 1000 ppb/year

Very High Stability (optional) Stability ±2x10e-9 over 0°C to 65°C

Ageing: ± 0.5 ppb/day
± 500 ppb/10 year

When an external source is selected (attached to 10 MHz ref In interface), the following frequencies
can be inserted.
1 MHz, 2 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz or 20 MHz.
Select the external clock reference for synchronization with other devices to have a higher stability
than the internal default stability.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 182/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.6 Demodulator
The demodulator functional block is used to perform the demodulation of the incoming RF signal
(L-band or IF-band).
Depending on the device configuration the following modes are available:
• DVB-S2 (only, option DH-01)
• DVB-S2, DVB-S2X and S2 Extensions (option DH-02)
Please refer to the section Options on page 10 .
Also refer to the section Device Identification on page 115 to get an overview of the options that are
installed on the device.

MDM6000 >> Demodulator

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 183/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The main parameters are:

• Enable • Physical Layer Scrambler Signature

• Mode • LNB Power Supply
• Input Frequency • Transponder Operational Mode
• Symbol Rate • Spectral Inversion
• Acquisition Range • Monitoring parameters
• Roll-off • MODCOD Statistics
• Input Selection

15.6.1 Enable/Disable Demodulator

MDM6000 >> Demodulator >> Enable

Each demodulator can be enabled or disabled by setting the Enable parameter either "off" or "on" for
respectively activating or de-activating the specific demodulator.

15.6.2 Demodulation Mode

MDM6000 >> Demodulator >> Mode

Set the demodulation mode:

• DVB-S2
• DVB-S2X
• S2 Extensions
(To see which modes are available on the device please check the installed device options, refer to
section Device Identification on page 115).
For more info on DVB-S2, DVB-S2X and S2 extensions please refer to
Appendix - Overview of the Used Technologies on page 305

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 184/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.6.3 Input Frequency

MDM6000 >> Demodulator >> Input Frequency

Set the input frequency of the demodulator. The input frequency must be in-line with the device
capabilities (L-band or IF band) and the system requirements.
Output Frequency
• L-band: 950 MHz to 2150 MHz
• IF-band: 50 MHz to 180 MHz
The device performs a check whether the entered frequency is within the allowed frequency range.

15.6.4 Symbol Rate

Define the symbol rate in Mbaud.

15.6.5 Acquisition Range

Define the amount of frequency uncertainty the demodulator will search over in order to find and
lock to an incoming carrier.
The range is between 0.05 MHz to 7.5 MHz.

15.6.6 Roll-Off Factor and Occupied Bandwidth

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Roll-Off

Select the appropriate roll-off factor.

The possibilities are:
• 35%
• 25%
• 20%
• 15% (Clean Channel Technology)
• 10% (Clean Channel Technology)
• 5% (Clean Channel Technology)

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 185/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The following figure compares 20% roll-off with 5% roll-off.

By lowering the roll-off factor and accordingly increasing the symbol rate, the throughput can be
increased while maintaining the same occupied (leased) bandwidth.

Clean Channel Technology®

Newtec's Clean Channel Technology is a combination of improved roll-off factors for DVB-S2 and
advanced filtering technologies to allow optimal carrier spacing. The combination can bring
efficiency gains up to 15%.
Clean channel technology consists out of the following three effects.
A first effect in the Clean Channel Technology is applying a smaller Roll-Off (RO) percentage than
currently used in the DVB-S2 standard. In the DVB-S2 standard the 20% and 25% roll-off factor
percentages are common. Basically this means that these percentages need to be added to the
desired bandwidth over satellite. Reducing these roll-off factors to 5%, 10% or 15% results in a
direct gain in bandwidth. This is reflected in the following formula:

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 186/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Multi carrier per Transponder:

Occupied bandwidth = Symbol Rate*(1 + roll-off factor).

Example for Occupied bandwidth 3 MHz.

• DVB-S (35%) 2.2 Mbaud • DVB-S2 (15%) 2.6 Mbaud

• DVB-S2 (25%) 2.4 Mbaud • DVB-S2 (10%) 2.7 Mbaud
• DVB-S2 (20%) 2.5 Mbaud • DVB-S2 (5%) 2.8 Mbaud

Single Carrier per Transponder:

Two limits are possible:
• Limit1:

Symbol Rate = Transponder Separation / (1+roll-off Factor)

The minimum roll-off factor that may be selected with this formula is 10%.

• Limit2:
Symbol Rate =User Bandwidth / (1+roll-off Factor)

For example:
A 36 MHz transponder with 40 MHz Separation.

Roll-Off Limit 1: Limit 2:

Factor (%)
Transponder Separation based User Bandwidth based

35 29.6 Mbaud 26,7 Mbaud

25 32 Mbaud 28,8 Mbaud

20 33.3 Mbaud 30,0 Mbaud

15 34.8 Mbaud 31,1 Mbaud

10 36.4 Mbaud 32,7 Mbaud

5 36.4 Mbaud 34,3 Mbaud

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 187/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.6.7 Input Selection

MDM6000 >> Demodulator >> Input Selection

Following Input selections are possible:

• L-band Rx A
• L-band Rx B
• IFRx.

15.6.8 Physical Layer Scrambler Signature

MDM6000 >> Modulator >> PL Scrambler Signature

The following information about the Physical Scrambler Signature is taken from the
DVB-S2 standard. Refer to the following document, ETSI EN 302 307.

In case of broadcasting services, the PL Scrambler Signature = 0 shall be used as default sequence,
this to avoid manual receiver setting or synchronization delays.
The PL Scrambler Signature, assuming values in the range 0 to 262 141, indicates the spreading
sequence number. The use of different PL Scrambling sequences allows a reduction of interference
correlation between different services. For the same purpose, it is possible to reuse a shifted version
of the same sequence in different satellite beams. Furthermore, the PL Scrambler Signature can be
unequivocally associated to each satellite operator, satellite, or transponder, thus permitting
identification of an interfering signal via the PL Scrambling "signature" detection. There is no explicit
signaling method to convey the PL Scrambling signature value to the receiver.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 188/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.6.9 LNB Power Supply

MDM6000 >> Demodulator >> LNB Power Supply

The MDM6000 Satellite Modem provides the possibility to add a DC power and frequency band
selection signals compatible with most professional and commercial LNBs.
• 13V/0 kHz
• 13V/22 kHz
• 18V/0 kHz
• 18V/22 kHz

If LNB power is enabled, devices that do not tolerate a DC-voltage at their input can
be damaged (e.g. non-Newtec outdoor units, spectrum analyzers).In this case it is
advised to use a DC-block at the input of the device.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 189/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.6.10 Transponder Operation Mode Demodulator

MDM6000 >> Demodulator

The Transponder Operation Mode Configuration defines the satellite configuration of the link and
thereby helps the modulator and demodulator to select the right MODCODs (linear or non-linear)
and the appropriate distortion margins and ACM mechanism to be used.

Make sure that the selected operation mode is the same as the operation mode
selected on the modulator (of the sending site).

Transponder Operation Description

Mode

Multiple Carrier per The multi carrier per transponder configuration is to be used in the
Transponder case the transponder is operated in multiple carriers per
transponder on the satellite.
Demodulator C/D estimate: not used
MODCOD selection: Linear MODCODs are used only
ACM Distortion Margin: 0.0 dB for all MODCODs
ACM Mechanism used: Linear Carrier is used.

Single Carrier per The single carrier per transponder configuration in linear mode
Transponder – Linear configuration assumes that the transponder has sufficient backoff
to be considered in linear mode with a single carrier and that the
operation is clearly within linear region of the transponder.
Demodulator C/D estimate: is used in the link.
MODCOD selection: Linear MODCODs are used only.
ACM Distortion Margin: 0.0 dB for all MODCODs.
ACM Mechanism used: Link Margin is used.

Single Carrier per In the case the satellite channel is operated in a single carrier per
Transponder – transponder mode in the non-linear amplification region of the
Non-Linear transponder.
Demodulator C/D estimate: is used in the link.
MODCOD selection: Non-linear MODCODs are used only.
ACM Distortion Margin: defined in table / MODCOD.
ACM Mechanism used: Non-linear carrier is used.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 190/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.6.11 Spectral Inversion

MDM6000 >> Demodulator >> Spectral Inversion

Define if spectral inversion is detected automatically or set manually.

When spectral inversion is known, it is advised to set it manually as (re)lock time will decrease.

15.6.12 Backup Carrier

These settings are implemented to migrate a system setup from frequency 1 and symbol rate 1
(current) to a new frequency 2 and symbol rate 2 (new).
Configure these settings on the demodulator/modem of the remote sites when the modulator/modem
on the hub site has to change to a new carrier.
When this new carrier becomes active, the complete network is switched to this backup carrier
configuration.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 191/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The following procedure is performed in the network.

Time HUB Remote Site(s)

Start Transmit on: The remote site is locked on:

• Frequency 1 • Frequency 1
• Symbol rate 1 • Symbol Rate 1

Preconfiguration Transmit on: The remote site is locked on:

• Frequency 1 • Frequency 1

• Symbol rate 1 • Symbol Rate 1

Pre configure the remote site as follows:

» Backup Carrier Enable: Enable (arm the switchover);

» Configure the backup carrier input frequency =
Frequency 2

» Configure the Carrier Symbol Rate = Symbol Rate 2

» Configure the Carrier Switch Timeout

Carrier switch Transmit on: 1. The remote site loses lock (Demod alarms are not visible
during Carrier Switch Time).
• Frequency 2
2. The remote site tries to connect with the Back carrier
• Symbol rate 2 input frequency (Frequency 2, symbol rate 2).
3. The remote site is locked on frequency 2, symbol rate 2.

The network is Transmit on: 1. The remote site is locked on frequency 2, symbol rate 2.
stable
• Frequency 2 2. Disable the Backup Carrier Enable setting.

• Symbol rate 2 Disabling the Backup Carrier Enable

Saves the Backup Carrier Input
Frequency to the demodulator Input
Frequency.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 192/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.6.12.1 Configure the Backup Carrier

Go to the following menu to configure the different settings on the remote site:

MDM6000 >> Demodulator >> Backup Carrier

Setting Description
Backup Carrier Enable Use this to arm the switch between the main input frequency
and the backup carrier input frequency.

Backup Carrier Input Preconfigured RF input frequency.

Frequency The demodulator tries to lock onto this frequency when a
Demodulator No PL Lock alarm is generated.

Backup Carrier Symbol Rate Preconfigured nominal symbol rate.

The demodulator tries to lock with the preconfigured symbol rate
when a Demodulator No PL Lock alarm is generated.

Backup Carrier Switch This is the time interval (in seconds) between consecutive
Timeout demodulator carrier switch operations.
When this time is to short the device is unable to
connect to the other frequency and can result in
permanent loss of satellite link connection.
By default this is 60 seconds.

Active Carrier Indicates which carries (main or backup) is currently active.

Backup Carrier Switch Count The number of times we have dynamically switched to another
carrier (with or without success).

The next sequence is followed on the remote site.

When the demodulator/modem on the remote site looses connection (unlock) with the current
frequency a switch is performed to the other frequency.
When the demodulator is not locked within the Carrier Switch Timeout the second frequency is tried.
This sequence continues until the demodulator is locked.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 193/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.6.12.2 Make the Backup Carrier Permanent

Once the system setup is in a stable situation and the migration to the new frequency is (backup
frequency) is performed
Once the system setup is migrated to the new frequency (backup frequency) it is possible to make
the backup frequency permanent. This means that it becomes the main frequency. To do this:

» Disable the Backup Carrier Enable setting.

The backup carrier input frequency value is written to the input frequency.

» Save the configuration (please refer to section: Save a Configuration on page 107 .

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 194/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.6.13 Monitoring Parameters

The monitoring parameters provide a global overview of the incoming signal.

Parameter Description
Carrier Input This indicates the power level measured of the carrier. When the carrier uses
Level a part of the transponder, the measured level is smaller than the value
measured for the full input range.

EsN0 Signal to noise ratio of the satellite link.

L-Band Input This indicates the power level measured over the total input range in dBm.
Level
Phase Noise Phase noise indication (expressed in degrees).
Indication Phase noise indicates fluctuations phase of the carrier.
Offset to The following is formula is applied:
reference
Integrated Phase Noise (degr) / Reference Mask Phase Noise (degr).
Mask
This monitoring parameter compares the 'Integrated Phase Noise' estimator
with a reference phase noise mask.
The mask is considered as what is worst case reference for a professional
grade system. The target value is shown in the table next to it.
The following table displays the difference between the worst case reference
and the target value per measured frequency.

Frequency Phase Noise level [dBc/Hz]

Worst Case Reference Target Value

10 Hz -27 -32.9
100 Hz -45 -61.9
1 kHz -65 -78.7
10 kHz -75 -88.7

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 195/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description

100 kHz -89 -94.8

1 MHz -102 -105.7
10 MHz -112 115.74
> 50 MHz -117.7

For the comparison the reference phase noise is integrated within the correct
bandwidth (the bandwidth used by the phase noise estimator). The phase
noise estimator is compared to the reference and the difference is expressed
in dB.
In practice the target value is about -4 to -14 dB better than the
worst case reference.

Non linearity This value provides an indication of the non-linearity of the carrier in %.
Indication
Symbol Rate Displays the symbol rate measured on the input interface.
Carrier Offset Displays the frequency offset between the actual (tracked) frequency and the
set frequency.
Frame Counter Displays the amount of incoming frames.
Dummy Frame Displays the amount of dummy frames that are transmitted over the satellite
Counter link.
Errored Frame Displays the amount of error frames.
Counter
Cycle Slip A cycle slip occurs when the symbol phase tracking loop fails.
Frame Counter Cycles slips indicate that system phase noise affect performance.
Phase discontinuities due to a local oscillator stability issues will also be
reflected in cycle slips.
Also check if the LNB is still working as expected.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 196/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.6.14 Reset MODCOD Statistics

MDM6000 >> Demodulator

Resets the counters.

15.6.15 MODCOD Statistics

MDM6000 >> Demodulator >> MODCOD Statistics

The following figure shows the overview of the MODCOD Statistics in the graphical user interface.

The previous figure shows the MODCOD Statistics linked to a Spectrum Analyzer Measurement.
(See the next page for parameter descriptions. )

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 197/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description

MODCOD This monitoring parameter displays the detected modulation and FEC used
for each of the DVB-S2 or S2-Extension streams in the received carrier.

Frame Counter This monitoring parameter displays the number of baseband frames that are
decoded by the demodulator board for each of the DVB-S2 or S2-Extension
streams streams in the received carrier.

Errored Frame This monitoring parameter displays the number of uncorrected baseband
Counter frames by the demodulator board for each of the DVB-S2 or S2 Extension
streams streams in the received carrier.

It indicates that the link margin is too low, that channel distortions are caused
by saturation or non-linearity caused the decoder to be unable to correctly
decode frames.

Cycle Slip A cycle slip occurs when the symbol phase tracking loop fails.
Counter Cycles slips gives the indication that system phase noise affect performance.
Phase discontinuities due to LO stability issues will also be reflected in cycle
slips.

Packet Error This parameter displays the packet error ratio of the received DVB-S2 or
Ratio S2-Extension streams.

Link Margin This monitoring parameter indicates how much the C/N or Es/No (including
the distortion) is above the decoding threshold.
It is a measure for the number of dBs of fading that is possible on the link
before the demodulator is not able to decode the received signal anymore.
Clipping will happen if the Es/No of the stream is too high, this is indicated
with the following symbol >.

C/N C/N or Carrier-to-Noise ratio.

This value (in dB) is a measure of the received carrier strength relative to the
strength of the received noise.

C/D C/D or Carrier-to-Distortion.

This value (in dB) is a measure for the distortion due to linear and non-linear
degradation that is present in each of the DVB-S2 or S2-Extension streams
in the received carrier.
Note: This parameter will only be shown when the transponder operation
mode is Single Carrier per Transponder.

C/ND C/ND stands for Carrier-to-noise + distortion.

The actual carrier to noise level by taking into account the effect of distortion
(C/D).
This value (in dB) is a measure of the received carrier strength relative to the
strength of the received noise with distortion added. This measurement
reflects the channel quality.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 198/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The link margin clipping will indicate "<" or ">" when the link margin value is too low
or too high to be accurately determined.In case it is too low, the link margin might be
too low in order for the detector to operate correctly.With the link margin too high,
there might not be enough decoding errors in order for the detector to display a
meaningful value.

Please note that during the lock acquisition phase the monitoring statistics display
irrelevant data due to different lock attempts on different MODCODs.
After 5 seconds of stable lock conditions the statistics are reset automatically. After
this reset the statistics show valid data.

15.6.16 External Converter

MDM6000 >> Demodulator >> External Convertor

This feature allows the user to see the actual RF input frequency used to receive the signal.
Depending on the spectral inversion the L-band Input Frequency is calculated as explained in the
following sections.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 199/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.6.16.1 Direct Spectrum

Input Frequency = RF Frequency - LO Frequency

For example
Note, the data used in this example is taken from a standard LNB.
• When using a Ku-band LNB with LO = 10 GHz and a receive band of 10.95 to 11.80 GHz, the
resulting L-band frequency (noted as the demod's "Input Frequency") will be in the range of 11.8
GHz - 10.0 GHz = 1800 MHz and 10.95 - 10.0 GHz = 950 MHz
In this case the
Input Frequency = RF Frequency - LO Frequency and the spectrum will be direct (because the
LO is lower in frequency as the received frequency).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 200/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.6.16.2 Inverted Spectrum

Input Frequency = LO Frequency - RF Frequency

For example
Note, The data used in this example is taken from a standard LNB.
• When using a C-band LNB with LO = 5.75 GHz and a receive band of 3.6 to 4.8 GHz, the
resulting L-band frequency (noted as the demod's "Input Frequency") will be in the range of 5.75
GHz - 3.6 GHz = 2150 MHz and 5.75GHz - 4.8 GHz = 950 MHz
In this case:
Input Frequency = LO Frequency - RF Frequency and the spectrum will be inverted (because the
LO is higher in frequency as the received frequency)

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 201/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.7 FlexACM®
In a satellite link operated with Newtec's FlexACM® technology, the modulator and demodulator
parts must exchange signaling information with each other in order to control dynamically the
modulation parameters in function of the instantaneous receive conditions in the demodulator. This
signaling consists of short messages in IP format. The average bit rate of this communication is very
low (only a few hundred bits per second).
The ACM forward signaling is transmitted over the satellite link (RF). The return signaling can be
transmitted over any communication channel between the modulator and demodulator, being a
satellite link or a terrestrial link.
Since there is by definition always a satellite link between the modulator and demodulator, the
communication from the modulator to the demodulator is in most cases transmitted in the satellite
signal itself. It is possible to send this signaling message in the same stream as the IP payload, or to
isolate it from the payload in another DVB-S2 or S2 Extensions stream (multi stream configuration).
For the FlexACM communication between the demodulator and the modulator, the implementation
depends on the topology of the network. For two-way DVB-S2 transmissions, the FlexACM
signaling can be transmitted in the DVB-S2 or S2 Extension return link, mixed with the IP payload or
in a separate DVB-S2 or S2-Extension stream. The FlexACM signaling can also be transmitted in
any other type of satellite return channel (for example VSAT) or terrestrial link (ADSL, GPRS,
etc…).

Enable ACM in the Encapsulator. Refer to the following sections:

• BBF Encapsulation Channels on page 238

• TS Encapsulation PIDs on page 248

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 202/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.7.1 MODCODs in Satellite Communication

Data transferred via a satellite is modulated and coded at the sending side and demodulated and
decoded at the receiving end.
The used modulation and coding (FEC) is called the MODCOD. Each combination of a specific
modulation and coding has a certain spectral efficiency determining the data throughput. This
spectral efficiency refers to the amount of information that can be transmitted over satellite in a given
bandwidth, the larger the spectral efficiency, the more information can be send over the satellite link
in the same bandwidth.
• A high MODCOD is linked to a high data rate but requires a good signal-to-noise ratio at the
receivers end;
• A low MODCOD functions with a lower signal-to-noise ratio at receivers end but has a lower data
rate.
As an example: the MODCOD 32 APSK-9/10 has a spectral efficiency of 4.45 while MODCOD
QPSK-1/4 has a spectral efficiency of 0.49.
In the S2 extension mode there is an increased number of MODCODs added to have an even better
performance, also taken into account linear operation.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 203/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.7.2 Why ACM?

An ACM system provides two major benefits:
• It always maximizes the throughput of a satellite link.
• It guarantees the availability of the link reception.
The circumstances in which satellite connections are active can change all the time, due to e.g.
changing weather conditions.

Imagine we have an optimal satellite connection between two sites in clear weather.
At this moment the satellite link has the following settings:
• High MODCOD
• High throughput
• Good signal quality
In these ideal circumstances and without fade, a high MODCOD can be used, and the throughput
over the satellite link is high.
Imagine it starts raining heavily at the receiving end.
The consequence is that the signal quality is decreased.
When the rain fade exceeds a maximum, the receiving demodulator is not able to demodulate the
incoming data anymore and the satellite link is interrupted.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 204/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

To prevent this, the satellite link can be configured in a lower MODCOD , resulting in a link working
for example 99,5% of the time. On the other hand, in good weather conditions, this MODCOD will
not be optimal, thus costing money because of the not used bandwidth.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 205/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

What we need is a MODCOD delivering the highest throughput at all time.

A FlexACM equipped satellite network delivers a very stable link with a variable bit rate, depending
on the conditions.
The following figure shows the way FlexACM works:

FlexACM allows modification of the modulation parameters of a satellite signal on the fly, without
interrupting the transmission and without losing data.
ACM allows using the highest possible modulation scheme and the lowest possible level of error
correction at all times. When the condition of the link gets worse because of fading, the system
automatically changes the parameters to avoid loss of signal reception.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 206/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.7.3 FlexACM in a Point to Point Setup

The following figure shows the point-to-point configuration.

Please refer to the Configuration Guidelines for FlexACM between two MDM6000
devices. This document can be found on the CD-ROM that is delivered together with
the device.

To be able to keep the optimal MODCOD at all time there must be feedback from the demodulator to
the modulator telling the modulator if another MODCOD should be chosen and what that MODCOD
should be.
Following applications are handling the FlexACM feature:
• The ACM client at demodulator side
• The ACM controller at the modulator side

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 207/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.8 Automatic Uplink Power Control

Automated uplink power control (AUPC) allows to regulate the power level in a point to point link.
The goal is to compensate for uplink fading events and keep a constant power level at the same
satellite input.
Downlink fading is not intentionally compensated and is separated from uplink fading.

15.8.1 AUPC Link Requirements

Uplink power control is a technique suitable to compensate uplink fading for uplink noise limited links
(for example with a smaller uplink antenna and a significantly higher downlink signal to noise ratio,
such as can be found in return channels with relatively small antennas in VSAT or trunking networks
and a big antenna in the hub).
The AUPC mechanism uses the power as well as the signal-to-noise ratio measurements on the
remote side to regulate the transmit power.
No external signal is required for the AUPC mechanism.

• Uplink noise limited link is a requirement for the AUPC mechanism.

The overall C/N of the link is largely determined by the C/N of the uplink as it is low compared to
the larger C/N in the downlink (usually due to the large antenna of the hub system). A change in
uplink C/N will have a profound effect on the overall C/N of the link.
• In systems that are downlink noise limited, AUPC is not recommended. This because a variation
of C/N in the uplink does hardly have an effect on the overall C/N since it is "dominated" by the
low C/N that is achievable in the downlink.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 208/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.8.2 Back Ground Information

Automatic Level Control Mode
Transponders that operate in ALC (Automatic Level Control) mode have a mechanism where a
detector at the input of the transponder measures the input power. If it decreases (due to fading in
the uplink), the gain will be increased in order to maintain a fixed downlink power. ALC operation is
typically found in single carrier per transponder operation such as uplink for DTH systems.

The AUPC mechanism used in the MDM6000 Satellite Modem is incompatible with
transponders set to ALC mode.

Fixed Gain Mode

In transponders operating in multi-carrier mode, ALC is not applicable. This is because not all links
exhibit fading at the same time so compensating the gain of the transponder for fading of a link will
have a negative effect on the other non-faded links and could cause intermodulation.
These transponders are said to operate in FGM (Fixed Gain Mode).

AUPC can be operated under the following conditions:

• Multi carrier/transponder mode with the transponder in Fixed Gain Mode.
• Single Carrier/transponder mode with the transponder in Fixed Gain mode.

In many large earth stations there is no need for AUPC in the modem as AUPC is
implemented in an external system that is based on a beacon receiver.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 209/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.8.3 AUPC Approaches

15.8.3.1 Beacon Based

For non ALC transponders, a possible implementation of AUPC is to use a dedicated beacon
receiver that measures the level of a beacon signal on the transponder. Variations in the beacon
level can only be created by fading that is present between the satellite and the uplink station where
the beacon receiver is located. The level of the beacon is then used to adjust the uplink power to
compensate for uplink fading.
A beacon receiver based AUPC mechanism requires additional hardware at the power control site.
This additional hardware allows however to distinguish between uplink and downlink fading as well.

This mode of AUPC can be operated in combination with transponders in FGM or

ALC mode.

15.8.3.2 Simple Implementation of AUPC

Another simple implementation of AUPC on modems which does not require additional hardware, is
to measure the Es/No (or Eb/No) on the receiving side and communicating it to the sending side
(over a return link) such that if the Es/No decreases, the output power of the sending side is
increased.
This works fine if the fade indeed occurs at the uplink. For interference or fades on the downlink this
may have the effect of increasing the power of the carrier without improving the receive level and
potentially violate the satellite operator defined power density ratios.

These mechanisms are only rarely used in practice and are often limited to a small range of uplink
power changes (2~3 dB) due to the difficult control of input power at satellite level.
For this reason the gain of this Es/No based AUPC is typically limited to a few dB in order to avoid
too much quality loss in the case of downlink fading, and also to protect the other carriers on the
transponders.
Most satellite operators don't allow AUPC on their transponders to assure that the bandwidth
equivalent power requirements are respected at all times.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 210/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.8.3.3 Improved AUPC Mechanism (implemented in the MDM6000 and

MCD6000)

The current implementation of the AUPC in the MDM6000 and MCD6000 represents an improved
AUPC mechanism using two parameters EsN0 as well as signal power and an elaborate processing
determines the uplink power control corrections, which allows to distinguish between gain changes,
interferences and fading.
For a link setup that is uplink noise limited, this results in a simple reliable AUPC mechanism without
the need of a beacon receiver.

15.8.4 AUPC
Newtec's AUPC mechanism provides an improved algorithm in the sense that it not only looks at the
Es/No but also at signal power and at the real link margin. Based on that, the modem can determine
whether or not fading is caused by uplink or downlink fading, as long as the link is setup in a correct
manner and that it is uplink limited in the link budget.
In case of downlink fading within a certain range, very little degradation is expected, since the link is
uplink limited. FlexACM kicks in for large fades to maintain a service continuity in case of higher
fading levels.
The advantages of Newtec's AUCP are:
• Built-in into the modem or network optimizer
• Larger range than traditional systems
• Combines with ACM (FlexACM)
• Able to distinguish different link impairments such as interference from rain fading events. This
leads to a reliable operation under uplink noise limited link budget setups."

15.8.5 AUPC Configuration

The configuration of AUPC must be done in close relationship with the satellite operator. Please
make an appointment with your satellite operator before starting this configuration.

It is mandatory to stay in contact with your satellite operator during configuration of

the AUPC feature.
This because the PEB (Power Equivalent Bandwidth) should be respected at all time.
The satellite operator will monitor this during the configuration.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 211/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The following figure shows the AUPC controller/Client and the weather conditions during
configuration of the AUPC Controller.

The following figure shows the required The following figure shows the scenario that is
nominal power. Note that a configured margin not allowed in any case!
is needed to respect the PEB at all time.

The configuration of the feature can be split up into three major parts.
• Gather all the BUC specifications and verify the link budget for an uplink noise limited link.
• Configuring the AUPC controller (sending site, uplink).
• Configuring the AUPC Client (remote site).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 212/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.8.5.1 Gather all Block Up Converter Specifications

The BUC specifications should be consulted by the responsible installer to ensure:

• That the BUC is operated with sufficient power backoff to keep the spectral re growth below
required limits.
• That the BUC back-off is sufficient under all temperature conditions.

Acquiring the specifications of the BUC is the full responsibility of the operator!

Also verify the link budget for the uplink noise limited link.

15.8.5.2 Configuration of the AUPC Controller

The following figure shows the AUPC controller and the clear weather conditions that should be
respected during configuration of the AUPC feature.

The following table describes the different AUPC controller parameters.

MDM6000 >> AUPC Controller

Parameter Value Description

AUPC Controller On/Off/ Activate (On)/deactivate (Off) the controller.
Enable Monitoring only
Monitoring only, use this setting when you want to
evaluate the feature. AUPC is simulated, next to the
monitoring results the different AUPC logging files can be
consulted.

Nominal Output Range This value needs to match with the output
Power level defined under:
-35 - 10 dBm
MDM6000 >> Modulator >> Output Power
Level
When this is not the case the modem
increases its power when AUPC is
Activated/Deactivated.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 213/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Value Description

The nominal output power is the reference value that

should be respected. (Refer to the figure below.)
The nominal output power should be configured to take
into account the satellite operators requirements in terms
of power equivalent bandwidth (PEB) for the defined link.
Finding the correct nominal output power is a joined effort
between the operator and the satellite operator. Finding
this value is done during clear weather conditions.
The satellite operator monitors if the PEB is respected
during the configuration of the nominal output power.
When all tests are finished (with a modulated signal) the
nominal output power is know.

Max Power Range The following requirements need to be met with the
Control configuration of the Max Power Control:
-35 - 10 dBm
• BUC on the out-door-unit configured with sufficient
Backoff to guarantee that the spectral re growth
requirements are met.
(This needs to be the case under all operational
temperature conditions of the BUC.
Pay attention to seasonal temperature changes of the
BUC that could change the backoff configuration over
long term.)

The AUPC range is then defined as

Max Power Control - Nominal power
Control. It is recommended that this
range does not exceed 10 dB.

For example: If the Nominal Output Power value is -25

dBm and the Max Power Control is -22 dBm, a power
compensation of maximum 3 dBm is possible during
fading.
Note that this value depends on the BUC specifications,
the MODCOD settings and the frequency band you are
operating in.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 214/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Value Description

Maximum power dBm/100 ms This step up value defines how fast fading will be
step up   compensated.
In other words, how much dBm (power) is added per
Typically set this second by the controller during fading. (Refer to the figure
value to 0.1 below.)
dBm/100 ms
Note: If the step up value is too high, this
could cause overshoot which will violate
the PEB.
Typically set this value to 0.1 dBm/100
ms.

Maximum power dBm/100ms The step down value defines how fast the power decrease
step down is done. How much dBm is removed per second by the
controller.
This should be faster than the power step up.
Again to avoid violating the PEB. (Refer to the figure
Typically set this
below.)
value to 0.5 dBm
/100 ms. Typically set this value to 0.5 dBm/100 ms.

The max power step down should be

larger than the max power step up.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 215/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Value Description

Modulator IP x.x.x.x/xx Enter the MGMT modulator IP Address when the AUPC
Address controller resides on another device than the MDM6000
(for example the NOP1760).
The IP address is needed to setup IP connectivity between
the controller (for example on the NOP1760) and the
MDM. This to exchange the AUPC messages.

Reference One terminal serves as the reference AUPC terminal in

Terminal the network.
This terminal is configured with its terminal ID in the AUPC
controller.
(Refer to the following figure)
For example: use Terminal Id2 as reference terminal.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 216/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.8.5.3 AUPC Controller Monitoring Parameters

The following table describes the different AUPC monitoring parameters.

Parameter Description

Forward configuration counter Displays the number of forwarded configuration

messages.

Client feedback counter: Displays the number of received client feedback counter
messages.

Power request counter Displays the number of power updates.

Requested modulator power Displays the amount of power requested by the

modulator.

Current modulator power Displays the power that is currently available on the
modulator.
Note: the current and the requested modulator power will
typically show a delay that is related to the
round-trip-time over satellite and the configured
controller parameters.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 217/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.8.5.4 Configure the AUPC Client

The following figure shows the AUPC client and the clear weather conditions that should be
respected during configuration of the AUPC feature.
The following steps should be performed:
• Enable the AUPC client.
• The Nominal input level should be calibrated to the input level measured at installation.

The AUPC Client monitors the input level and the Es/No value.

MDM6000 > AUPC Client

The following table describes the configuration table, use it to activate or deactivate the AUPC
client:

Parameter Value Description

Configuration .

Index 1 This is the ID of your demodulator.

Note, the tables are foreseen to be able to

handle multiple demodulators in one
device (in case of HUB6000). In case of
the MDM6000 the index is always 1.

Enable On/Off Activate or deactivate the AUPC client. When activated

the client generates AUPC messages that are
transmitted to the controller.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 218/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The following table describes the calibration table, use it to define the nominal input level and the
nominal Es/No value:

Parameter Value Description

Calibration

Index 1 This is the ID of your demodulator.

Nominal Input dBm The nominal input level should be the same as the input
Level level measured by the monitoring tool of the satellite
operator during calibration.
During the calibration
Copy the measured input level and "paste" it as the
nominal input value.
During operation
The nominal input level is used as a reference. The
moment fading is present in the uplink a variation will
be detected and a compensation will monitored.

Nominal Es/No dB The nominal Es/No value should be the same as the
Es/No measured by the monitoring tool of the satellite
operator during calibration.

During the calibration

Copy the measured Es/No level and "paste" it as the
nominal input value.

The nominal Es/No value is used as a reference. The

moment fading is present in the uplink, a compensation
will be monitored in accordance to this reference.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 219/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The following table describes the monitoring table:

Parameter Value Description

Monitoring

Index 1 This is the ID of your demodulator.

State on/off The AUPC client is active or inactive. When active,

reporting is done between the AUPC Client and the
AUPC Controller.
In this case the compensation value is sent back to the
controller.

Input Level dBm Displays the current input level measured on the Rx
interface of the demodulator.

Es/No dB Displays the current Es/No value measured on the Rx

interface of the demodulator.

Current dB Displays the compensation factor that is required to

Compensation reach the nominal power value. The compensation factor
is reported to the AUPC controller.

Estimated dB The fading estimate is derived from the nominal Es/No

remote uplink and the measured Es/No on the Rx interface of the
Fading demodulator.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 220/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The following table describes the alarm states table:

Parameter State Description

Alarm States

Index 1 This is the ID of your demodulator.

AUPC Client This alarm indicates that the AUPC client subsystem
Calibration has not been calibrated.
Absent

AUPC Client This alarm indicates that the AUPC client wants to
Calibration operate outside the calibrated range.
violation

15.8.5.5 AUPC Logging

The logging files are useful during evaluation of the AUPC feature but they also become important
during debugging.
Logging files of the AUPC can always be viewed or downloaded from the Tasks Pane (Refer to the
following figure).

To be able to perform good logging it is mandatory that the date and the time of all the
devices in the system setup are correctly configured.

The following Log files are available.

• Client Log
• AUPC terminals Log
• AUPC level log

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 221/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Client Log

Parameter Description

Timestamp Time of the event.

Current Displays the power compensation (in dBm) measured during the logging
Compensation event.

Level Change Displays the level change.

Es/NoChange Displays the Es/No change.

Fading Displays the fading estimate, this value is derived from the nominal Es/No
Estimation and the measured Es/No on the RX interface of the demodulator during the
logging event.

AUPC Terminals Log

Parameter Description

Timestamp Time of the event.

Terminal Id Displays the Terminal Id, indicating to which receiving device this logging
event is related.

Client State Displays the state of the AUPC client during the logging event.

Fading Displays the fading estimate, this value is derived from the nominal Es/No
Estimation and the measured Es/No on the Rx interface of the demodulator during the
logging event.

AUPC Level Log

Parameter Description

Timestamp Time of the logging event.

Level Change Displays the level change

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 222/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.9 Device Redundancy

Redundancy is very important as a single failure of the modulator affects many services at the same
time.
Reliable operation of the satellite modulation in a satellite network is of key importance. The
MDM6000 works seamlessly together with the Newtec AZ202/AZ212 redundancy switches to
provide best-in-class system uptime.

Refer to the user manual of the USS0202/USS0212 Universal Switching System.

The following figures shows a 1+1 protection scheme built up with the AZ202 switch, one in normal
operation and one in redundant operation.
Normal Operation

Redundant Operation

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 223/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

To Enable or Disable device redundancy go to the following location:

MDM6000 >> Device >> Redundancy

When device redundancy is enabled, the USS controls the actual operational redundancy state.

By default, device redundancy is disabled.

Initial Redundancy State:

• Standby (default value): This means when the device starts up and redundancy is enabled, the
initial state of the redundancy is standby. Typically:
– The modulator output is disabled
– No IP Address on the data interface
• Active.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 224/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.10 DC BUC Power On L-Band Tx

The MDM6000 offers an optional DC power supply on the L-band Tx interface that can be used to
power BUCs. This option combines the L-band transmit signal coming from the modulator with a DC
power supply and an optional 10 MHz reference signal. All these signals can be combined onto the
L-band Tx Interface (N-connector).
The DC power supply (when enabled) provides a 24 V or 48 V DC voltage  with a maximum
continuous current of 3.8 A on the L-band Tx interface. Both possibilities are available when one of
the following sales options, OU-05 or OU-06, is ordered.

15.10.1 Back Panel Description

The following figure shows the L-Band Tx connector when the BUC power for L-band Tx option is
ordered.

The connector used is an N-connector 50 Ohm (Female).

Two LEDs indicate the state of the power supply.We refer to section
LED Behavior of the DC BUC Power for L-Band Tx on page 226.

Switch off the power of the device before connecting the coax cable. This reduces the
risk of personal injury from electric shock or damage to the device.

The maximum continuous current on this connector is 3.8 A.

Use a coax cable (Cable Type DP-2!) as marked on the device.
This cable is tested for a maximum 60 V DC and a maximum of 8 A.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 225/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.10.2 LED Behavior of the DC BUC Power for L-Band Tx

There are two LEDs that indicate the state of the DC BUC power for L-band TX.
The active LED corresponds to the selected voltage.

Both LEDs have the same behavior.

LED State Time Behavior Description

Off This voltage is not applied on the L-Band Tx interface.

Steady This voltage is currently applied on the L-Band Tx interface.

1s An overload alarm is present on the DC power supply.

The circuit protection mechanism of the power supply is
triggered and disables the output power.
The protection mechanism monitors every 1 s if the overload
is removed and re-enables the DC supply if this is the case.
The following situations can trigger the overload alarm:
48 V
or 24 V • The connected load is too high.

Blinking • When a long cable is shorted at the outdoor equipment end.

5s A short circuit alarm is present on the DC supply.

The circuit protection mechanism of the power supply is
triggered and disables the output power.The protection
mechanism monitors every 5 s if the short circuit is removed
and re-enables the DC supply.
The following situations trigger the alarm:
• The connected load is too high.
• When a long cable is shorted at the outdoor equipment end.

When a short circuit is present, due to a direct

connection between the L-band Tx interface
and the earthing, the LEDs on the back panel
are off.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 226/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.10.3 Set the DC BUC Power for L-Band Tx

MDM6000 > Modulator >> BUC Power on L Band TX

Parameter Value Description

Enable On/Off Enable or Disable the L-Band DC supply.

voltage 24 V / Select the appropriate voltage for the equipment used in

48 V combination with the DC supply.On the back panel the
corresponding LED is activated.

Note: It is not possible to change this value when

the DC supply is enabled.

Measured Range Displays the actual voltage level on the L-band Tx interface.
Output
0V/48V
Voltage

Output Range Displays the actual current being delivered by the DC supply:
Current
0A/8A • When an overcurrent is detected the circuit protection
mechanism is triggered and disables the DC supply.
The protection mechanism monitors every 1 s if the overload
(overcurrent) is removed. The overload alarm is active.
• When a short circuit is detected the circuit protection mechanism
is triggered and disables the DC supply.
The protection mechanism monitors every 5 s if the short circuit
is removed.
The short circuit alarm is active.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 227/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11 Stream Encapsulation

Before the IP traffic is modulated, the IP traffic is classified, shaped and encapsulated.

Use one of the following encapsulation protocols.

• Protocols that are optimized for the DVB-S2 standard.
Typically used in applications where bandwidth efficiency is important, such as IP backbone or IP
trunking applications.
– GSE (Generic Stream Encapsulation) is a standard DVB protocol and generates marginally
less overhead than XPE.
– XPE (Extended Performance Encapsulation) is a Newtec Proprietary protocol and in general
used in combination with Newtec products such as EL470, EL970 or other compatible
Newtec products.
Note that XPE was the forerunner of GSE because GSE was not standardized yet.
• Protocols that are compatible with the regular MPEG Transport Streams (DVB-S standard).
Typically used when compatibility with legacy receiver products or interoperability with low cost
IP receivers or set top boxes are necessary.
– MPE (Multi Protocol Encapsulation), was the first available protocol and therefor widely used
by many legacy receivers.
– ULE (Ultra Light Encapsulation), is a protocol that is more flexible and next to this offers an
increased efficiency (better throughput).

Depending on the protocol a different procedure is used.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 228/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.1 General Encapsulation Settings

Navigate to the following location to configure the General Encapsulation settings. With general
settings we mean that these settings apply to both encapsulation protocol types (TS and BBF).

MDM6000 Satellite Modem >> Encapsulation

Enable this functional block to perform GSE or XPE encapsulation on the incoming IP data.
Select the appropriate forwarding mode: Layer 2 or Layer 3.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 229/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The MDM6000 supports two forwarding modes:

1. Layer 2 Forwarding Mode

As Layer 2 Ethernet bridge, the MDM6000 transparently forwards any Layer 3 protocol, MPLS or
VLAN tagged traffic. Consequently it can be considered to act as an Ethernet cable over satellite.
However, operating as Layer 2 Ethernet bridge creates extra overhead. Connected network
segments act as one broadcast domain, which can generate some traffic overhead on the satellite
link as well (e.g. ARP requests being sent over the satellite link).
Also note that the MDM6000 operates in promiscuous mode, meaning that it will forward any
incoming packet over the satellite link (for example ARP requests from host A to B while A and B are
on the same LAN segment).
But classification rules can be defined to limit this (excessive) traffic overhead.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 230/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

2. Layer 3 Forwarding Mode

As Layer 3 IP router, the MDM6000 can transport IPv4 packets based on static routing.In this mode,
there is less overhead (compared with L2 Ethernet bridging).
However because of the static routing, it is required to have a good IP plan made upfront (i.e. a
change of IP plan implies reconfiguring the static routes on the involved MDM6000).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 231/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.1.1 Carrier Settings

Parameter Value Description

Modulation DVB-S2 / Displays the modulation mode that is used.

Standard DVB-S2X/ Refer to the section Options on page 10 and
S2 Extensions Device Identification on page 115 to see the options
available on the device.

Pilots On/Off Pilots are modulated symbols grouped in blocks that are
added on the physical layer framing level.
• Use pilots to increase the reliability of the receiver
synchronization. (Increasing the performance and
robustness of the demodulator.).
• Pilots reduce the influence of phase noise in the
system.

In general it is advised to use

pilots(especially in the following cases).
• When a noticeable amount of phase
noise is present (for example LNBs with
"bad" phase noise).
• At low data rates.
• When distortion is present on the signal,
for example due to non-linearity.

Symbol Rate ... Mbaud Displays the configured symbol rate.

Refer to Symbol Rate on page 185 to set the value
according to the system setup.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 232/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.1.2 Delay Control

The delay control mechanism in the MDM6000 is used to optimize for jitter introduced by the
encapsulation mechanism and to optimize the available bandwidth used.

MDM6000 >> Encapsulation >> Delay Control

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 233/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description

Optimized for ACM This is the default setting, it optimizes the bandwidth usage by delaying
BBFs until they are completely filled with traffic data prior to effectively
transmitting them. The encapsulation interval and packing time are
dynamically set to allow optimal BBF efficiency even in case of bursty
traffic. This approach leads to the highest filling levels off the BBFs and
hence the highest efficiency on the link. On the downside, it introduces
a slightly variable amount of delay and additional jitter when dealing with
low rate and bursty traffic. Use this mode for higher rate, continuous
(quasi non-bursty) traffic.

Optimize for jitter This mode is preferred for low speed links with bursty traffic and
applications that are jitter sensitive as it will automatically lower the
encapsulation interval and packing time. This mode might lead to a slight
reduction in link efficiency as the BBFs are sent out at a steady pace
whether they are completely filled or not. This non-optimal link filling
efficiency is not so important as the link's filling level is variable anyhow
when dealing with bursty traffic.
For low speed links it is also advised to use short frames and
encapsulate all traffic (data and control plane) into the same ISI.

Manual This mode allows for manually setting the encapsulation interval and
packing time for specific applications. Use this mode only under
guidance of Newtec Customer Support.

Use the Newtec Service Desk tool to receive more

information.
> Browse to https://customersupport.newtec.eu.
> Fill in your Username and Password
> Create a ticket
As response of your request you will receive appropriate
feedback from our support team.
In case you don't have a Username and Password yet for
the Newtec Service Desk tool: request a login to
[email protected].

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 234/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.2 BBF Encapsulation

This encapsulator inserts IP packets directly into BBFs.
The following picture shows the complete traffic flow through the encapsulation block in case of BBF
Encapsulation.

As is visualized in the figure, the incoming IP traffic is first classified by the classification rules. Once
the rules are applied traffic shaping is performed.
Traffic shaping is a mechanism to perform congestion control. Configure the shaping nodes in such
a way that the traffic capacity and the quality of service is respected according to the needs or
contracts of the customer. Shaped traffic is still in IP format and not ready yet to be modulated. The
channel and encapsulator configuration parameters are used to create baseband frames.
This is done by configuring the BBF header parameters.
By configuring the channels a logical pipe is defined that carries traffic coming from the shaping
nodes. The shaping nodes are linked to this particular channel.
Next to linking the shaping nodes to a channel, the nominal MODCOD and whether or not ACM is
enabled is defined in the channel configuration.

In the encapsulator define the ISI (Input Stream Identifier) the frame type and the encapsulation
protocol that is used to put the payload into Baseband frames. Once the BBF header is completed
the traffic can be forwarded towards the modulator block.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 235/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.2.1 BBF Encapsulation ISIs

The encapsulator encapsulates the shaped IP traffic into BBFs. This is done by adding an ISI (Input
Stream Identifier), specifying the Baseband frame type (normal or short) and defining the used
encapsulation protocol.
The encapsulator adds this information into the BBF header. The following figure shows this
principle.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 236/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description

Name Name defining the encapsulator.

ISI Define the ISI (Input Stream Identifier).

Enable Activate the encapsulator.

Frame Size Select the BBF frame size to be used.

• Normal Frames (64800 bits);
• Short Frames (16200 bits).

When the S2 Extensions modulation mode is used, only normal

frames are possible.

Protocol Select the encapsulation protocol.

• GSE (Generic Stream Encapsulation), this is a protocol that is compliant
with the DVB-S2 standard. (it generates the least overhead in comparison
with XPE).
• XPE (Extended Performance Encapsulation) is a Newtec Proprietary
protocol.
(Use this protocol between Newtec equipment. It is implemented to be
backward compatible with elevation devices such as EL470, EL478,
EL978 and other Newtec devices supporting XPE.).

The BBFs are forwarded to the modulator for further processing.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 237/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.2.2 BBF Encapsulation Channels

Channels are logical pipes that are used to transport shaped traffic.
A channel can be used to transport a certain service towards a terminal or a group of terminals.
A terminal (receiving device) can receive multiple channels (for example: different services).
It is possible to combine traffic coming from several traffic shaping nodes and insert them into one
channel.
(Combining traffic from different shaping nodes is done by assigning the same Channel Name per
shaping node.)

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 238/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description

Channel Name Enter a logical channel name, for example the service that is transported
over this channel (ACM Signalling, VoIP Traffic, )

Enable This must be Enabled (On) otherwise the channel is not recognized and the
data cannot be encapsulated.

ISI Insert the Input Stream Identifier to link the channel with an encapsulator.

Label Enter a Label that you want to assign to this channel.

For more information refer to GSE Header on page 330 .
In a unicast configuration, the channel corresponds with one terminal.
In a "multicast" configuration, a "multicast Label Type" must be specified and
the terminals belonging to the specified "multicast label type group" can
receive the channels.
A receiver has the "multicast Label Type" configured in its filters, in the case
of a hardware receiver and in the decapsulation configuration block in the
case of a software receiver (i.e. NOP1760).

Nominal Define the initial MODCOD (in case of ACM) or the actual MODCOD (incase
MODCOD of no ACM) used in the system setup.
Depending on the modulation standard, define it for DVB-S2, DVB-S2X or
S2 Extensions.
The available MODCODs are dynamically changed according to the link
optimization setting.

ACM Enable Use this to activate or deactivate FlexACM® signaling.

Terminal When ACM is active, then the terminal name must correspond with the
Name terminal name of the receiving device. This to make sure that the ACM
signaling is transported to the correct device.
The terminal name of the receiving device is defined under

Root >> Terminals

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 239/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The following figure shows the complete data flow through the encapsulator. The figure also
visualizes that it is possible to fill one channel with data coming from different shaping nodes.
Furthermore it is indicated that the configuration flow is the opposite of the configuration flow.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 240/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.2.3 Traffic Shaping

The following figure illustrates how the classified traffic is shaped by the traffic shaper.

Per classified traffic node, traffic shaping can be performed.

Classification rules must always be attached to the most specific shaping node in a
shaping tree.

One shaping node cannot have both a child node and a rule attached to it.
(For example: Node1 with a Rule 1 and one child node Node11 is not possible and is
prohibited by the GUI.)

Traffic shaping makes it possible to restrict the maximum given PIR (Peak Information Rate) in a
flexible way. Next to the PIR a CIR (Committed Information Rate) is used for the distribution of the
total available rate.
The traffic shaping software also allows the distribution of the available rate among services in order
to e.g. higher prioritize time critical VoIP traffic and to throttle certain downloads.

As shown in the next figure, a Parent Node can contain more sub nodes. These sub nodes inherit
the settings of the previous node and are then again divided in a PIR and CIR.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 241/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

This is used to ensure that the available data rate is distributed in the most appropriate manner
among the users of the satellite network.
The traffic shaper provides adaptive traffic shaping, which makes it easy for shaping the traffic of
networks where the throughput of the link is varying over time.
Once the shaping is performed, the traffic is encapsulated into BBFs and forwarded to the correct
output channel.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 242/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description
Node Name Enter the shaping node name.

Enable This must be enabled (On), otherwise the node is not recognized and the
data cannot be encapsulated.

Parent Node The Root node is the top node of the shaping tree.
Name The Root node represents the overall available bandwidth.
The parent node name of the first shaping node must always
be Root!
Other nodes can have another parent node (when this node is
defined in the device!)

CIR Enter the Committed Information Rate for this Shaping Node.

PIR Enter the Peak Information Rate for this Shaping Node.

Channel Name Enter the corresponding channel name where the traffic must be sent to.
One channel can have several nodes and shaping rules.
Note: The channel names must match with a channel name configured
under channels, refer to the previous section
BBF Encapsulation Channels on page 238 .

Priority Enter a priority for this shaping Node.

Use this setting to prioritize the shaped traffic (for example: voice= 5,
video=10)
(The lower the value that is entered, the higher the priority.)

Max Queue Define a queue time per shaping node.

time This is a buffer based on the FIFO (First In First Out) principle. The buffer
provides the possibility to store an amount of data in a shaping node. When
the queue time is exceeded, data will be dropped.

Shaping Unit Select the shaping unit.

• Bitrate: This is commonly used as it guarantees the bitrate that can be
received by the terminals.
The disadvantage of this way of working is that optimal pointing is not
encouraged and due to that the available bandwidth is not always
optimally used.
• Symbol rate: This can be used when more than one service provider
makes use of the transponder bandwidth. In this case it is possible to
divide (shape) the bandwidth amongst the operators as agreed.
This way of working encourages the service provider to perform optimal
pointing of its terminals. This to obtain an optimal usage of its available
bandwidth.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 243/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.2.4 Traffic Classification

The purpose of traffic classification is to identify flows/streams of traffic that need a different
treatment.
Traffic classification is based on the destination Network Address, via classification expressions or a
combination of both.
Once the traffic is classified into a traffic node, this traffic is forwarded towards the traffic shaper.
The following figure illustrates how the incoming traffic is classified.

The traffic classification is listed under.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 244/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description
Classification Enter a logical classification name/rule.
Name

Enable Activate the classification rule.

Classification It is possible to define an expression to classify/filter out specific traffic. This

Expression expression can be standalone or combined with the Network Address (see
previous parameter).
Note that the syntax of the expression is being checked while typing.
Refer to Appendix - Classification Expressions on page 312 to get an overview of
the possible expressions.
Some examples are:
• ip4 dst net x.x.x.x/xx (this is layer 3)
• Filter out all icmp traffic with a rule like this:
(ip4 dst net xxx) and (icmp type echo-request)
• Give priority to same traffic for one specific host: ip4 dst host 10.10.20.5
• All (Layer 2 Forwarding Mode)

Shaping Node Enter the node name to which the classified traffic belongs.
Name The Node Name must match with the Node Name defined in the Traffic
Shaping Menu.

Matching The matching order defines the order in which packets are processed by the
Order classification rules. This is important for disambiguation when multiple
classification rules match the same packet.
The order ranges from 1 (match first) to 99 (match last).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 245/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.3 TS Encapsulation
This encapsulator inserts IP packets first into TS packets and then into BBFs.
The following picture shows the complete traffic flow through the encapsulation block in case of TS
Encapsulation.

As is visualized in the figure, the incoming IP traffic is first classified by the classification rules. Once
the rules are applied traffic shaping is performed.
Traffic shaping is a mechanism to perform congestion control. Configure the shaping nodes in such
a way that the traffic capacity and the quality of service is respected according to the needs or
contracts of the customer. Shaped traffic is still in IP format and not ready yet to be modulated.
The channel, encapsulator PIDs and encapsulator ISI configuration parameters are used to create
baseband frames. An intermediate step in this procedure is to create TS packets. This is done in the
encapsulator PIDs block.
Creating baseband frames is done by configuring the BBF header parameters.
By configuring the channels you define a logical pipe that carries traffic coming from shaping nodes.
These shaping nodes are linked to this particular channel. Next to linking the shaping nodes to a
channel, a label and a terminal name are defined.
Creating TS packets is done by configuring the Encapsulator PIDs. In this block define the Program
Identification and what protocol (MPE or ULE) is used to encapsulate the payload.
In the encapsulator ISI define the Input Stream Identifier and the frame type (normal/short).
Once the BBF header is completed the traffic can be forwarded towards the modulator block.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 246/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.3.1 TS Encapsulation ISIs

Parameter Description
Name Enter a logical unique name.
Note: A unique name is proposed by the device.

Enable Enable the encapsulator.

ISI Insert the Input Stream Identifier.

Frame Size Normal frames = 64800 bits

Short frames = 16200 bits
At data rates under 4 Mbps we recommend to use short frames.
This to increase the BBF filling level.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 247/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.3.2 TS Encapsulation PIDs

Parameter Description
Name Enter a logical unique name.
Note: A unique name is proposed by the device.

Enable Enable the creation of PIDs.

This adds a Program Identifier to the transport stream packet that is
being created.
This is needed by the receiver, to filter out this specific program.

PID Enter the Program Identifier number. This number is added to the
header transport stream. It will be used by the decapsulator on the
receiver site.

ISI Select one of the available ISI names.

The available names are defined under ISIs.

Protocol Here you have the possibility to overrule the default protocol that has
been selected under the general encapsulation settings.
Refer to Encapsulation General Settings on page 229 .

Nominal DVB-S2 Select the ModCod to be used (overruled when ACM is

MODCOD enabled).(overruled when ACM is enabled).

ACM Enable This configuration guideline does not cover ACM.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 248/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.3.3 TS Encapsulation Channels

Parameter Description
Channel Name Enter a logical channel name, for example the service that is transported
over this channel (ACM Signaling, VoIP Traffic, )

Enable This must be Enabled (On) otherwise the channel is not recognized and the
data cannot be encapsulated.

PID Select one of the available PID names.

The available names are defined under TS Encapsulation PIDs.

Label Enter a Label that you want to assign to this channel.

Use a label when you want to address a specific receiver.

For MPE a label is required!

For more information refer to GSE Header on page 330 .

In a unicast configuration, the channel corresponds with one terminal.
In a "multicast" configuration, a "multicast Label Type" must be specified and
the terminals belonging to the specified "multicast label type group" can
receive the channels.
A receiver has the "multicast Label Type" configured in its filters, in the case
of a hardware receiver and in the decapsulation configuration block in the
case of a software receiver (i.e. NOP1760).

Terminal When ACM is active, then the terminal name must correspond with the
Name terminal name of the receiving device. This to make sure that the ACM
signaling is transported to the correct device.
The terminal name of the receiving device is defined under

Root >> Terminals

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 249/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.3.4 Traffic Shaping

The following figure illustrates how the classified traffic is shaped by the traffic shaper.

Per classified traffic node, traffic shaping can be performed.

Classification rules must always be attached to the most specific shaping node in a
shaping tree.

One shaping node cannot have both a child node and a rule attached to it.
(For example: Node1 with a Rule 1 and one child node Node11 is not possible and is
prohibited by the GUI.)

Traffic shaping makes it possible to restrict the maximum given PIR (Peak Information Rate) in a
flexible way. Next to the PIR a CIR (Committed Information Rate) is used for the distribution of the
total available rate.
The traffic shaping software also allows the distribution of the available rate among services in order
to e.g. higher prioritize time critical VoIP traffic and to throttle certain downloads.

As shown in the next figure, a Parent Node can contain more sub nodes. These sub nodes inherit
the settings of the previous node and are then again divided in a PIR and CIR.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 250/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

This is used to ensure that the available data rate is distributed in the most appropriate manner
among the users of the satellite network.
The traffic shaper provides adaptive traffic shaping, which makes it easy for shaping the traffic of
networks where the throughput of the link is varying over time.
Once the shaping is performed, the traffic is encapsulated into BBFs and forwarded to the correct
output channel.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 251/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description
Node Name Enter the shaping node name.

Enable This must be enabled (On), otherwise the node is not recognized and the
data cannot be encapsulated.

Parent Node The Root node is the top node of the shaping tree.
Name The Root node represents the overall available bandwidth.
The parent node name of the first shaping node must always
be Root!
Other nodes can have another parent node (when this node is
defined in the device!)

CIR Enter the Committed Information Rate for this Shaping Node.

PIR Enter the Peak Information Rate for this Shaping Node.

Channel Name Enter the corresponding channel name where the traffic must be sent to.
One channel can have several nodes and shaping rules.
Note: The channel names must match with a channel name configured
under channels, refer to the previous section
BBF Encapsulation Channels on page 238 .

Priority Enter a priority for this shaping Node.

Use this setting to prioritize the shaped traffic (for example: voice= 5,
video=10)
(The lower the value that is entered, the higher the priority.)

Max Queue Define a queue time per shaping node.

time This is a buffer based on the FIFO (First In First Out) principle. The buffer
provides the possibility to store an amount of data in a shaping node. When
the queue time is exceeded, data will be dropped.

Shaping Unit Select the shaping unit.

• Bitrate: This is commonly used as it guarantees the bitrate that can be
received by the terminals.
The disadvantage of this way of working is that optimal pointing is not
encouraged and due to that the available bandwidth is not always
optimally used.
• Symbol rate: This can be used when more than one service provider
makes use of the transponder bandwidth. In this case it is possible to
divide (shape) the bandwidth amongst the operators as agreed.
This way of working encourages the service provider to perform optimal
pointing of its terminals. This to obtain an optimal usage of its available
bandwidth.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 252/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.3.5 Traffic Classification

The purpose of traffic classification is to identify flows/streams of traffic that need a different
treatment.
Traffic classification is based on the destination Network Address, via classification expressions or a
combination of both.
Once the traffic is classified into a traffic node, this traffic is forwarded towards the traffic shaper.
The following figure illustrates how the incoming traffic is classified.

The traffic classification is listed under.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 253/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description
Classification Enter a logical classification name/rule.
Name

Enable Activate the classification rule.

Classification It is possible to define an expression to classify/filter out specific traffic. This

Expression expression can be standalone or combined with the Network Address (see
previous parameter).
Note that the syntax of the expression is being checked while typing.
Refer to Appendix - Classification Expressions on page 312 to get an overview of
the possible expressions.
Some examples are:
• ip4 dst net x.x.x.x/xx (this is layer 3)
• Filter out all icmp traffic with a rule like this:
(ip4 dst net xxx) and (icmp type echo-request)
• Give priority to same traffic for one specific host: ip4 dst host 10.10.20.5
• All (Layer 2 Forwarding Mode)

Shaping Node Enter the node name to which the classified traffic belongs.
Name The Node Name must match with the Node Name defined in the Traffic
Shaping Menu.

Matching The matching order defines the order in which packets are processed by the
Order classification rules. This is important for disambiguation when multiple
classification rules match the same packet.
The order ranges from 1 (match first) to 99 (match last).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 254/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.11.4 QOS Rule to Drop Incoming Traffic

When unwanted IP traffic is arriving on the device, malicious or just traffic you don't want to transmit
over the air, the MDM6000 makes it possible to classify this traffic and drop it.
Refer to the following figure:

Proceed as follows to discard this traffic:

» Add a classification rule (to select the unwanted traffic).

» Select the discard node.

All traffic that is captured by the rule is discarded (dropped), no further processing is performed on
this traffic.

MDM6000 >> Encapsulation >Shaping

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 255/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 256/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.12 Stream Decapsulation

Baseband frames coming from the satellite (processed by the MDM6000 Satellite Modem) are
inserted in one of the two input satellite interfaces. The BBFs are decapsulated by stripping of the
protocol header information, GSE, XPE, MPE or ULE.
The payload data is available on one of the two output interfaces Data1/Data2.
The decapsulator can handle Layer 3 and Layer 2 traffic, as described in
Encapsulation General Settings on page 229 .

MDM6000 Satellite Modem >> Decapsulation

15.12.1 Decapsulation General Settings

Enable this functional block to perform decapsulation on the incoming IP data (coming from the
satellite).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 257/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description

Enable Enable the stream decapsulation.

Forwarding Mode Set the forwarding mode: Layer 3 (IP Router) or Layer 2 (Ethernet Bridge).
More details about Forwarding Mode can be found in
Encapsulation General Settings on page 229 .

Default BBF Select the default decapsulation protocol that is mainly used to
Decapsulation decapsulated the incoming BBFs.
Protocol
• GSE
• XPE

Default TS Select the default decapsulation protocol that is mainly used to

Decapsulation decapsulated the incoming "TS packets".
Protocol
• MPE
• ULE

XPE Checksum Use this setting when the encapsulated packets are in XPE format and
when a CRC check is activated on the transmitter site. This setting is
basically introduced to be compatible with legacy equipment (such as the
EL470).

ISI Filtering Enable ISI filtering.

When this is not enabled no filtering is performed and the

decapsulation cannot take place!

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 258/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.12.2 BBF Decapsulation

15.12.2.1 BBF Decapsulation ISIs

Define the settings to filter out the required channels.

Parameter Description
Name Indicate the ISI that you want to decapsulate.
Verify the used channel name on the sending site.

Enable Activate the decapsulation of the ISI.

ISI Enter the ISI value that you want to filter out. This must correspond to the
ISI value defined on the sending site. (In this case on the remote site).

Demod ID This is the default ID.

Protocol Here you have the possibility to overrule the default protocol that has been
selected under the general decapsulation settings. Refer to
Decapsulation General Settings on page 257.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 259/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.12.2.2 BBF Channel Decapsulation

Parameter Value Description

Channels

Name Channel1 Indicate the channel that you want to decapsulate.

Enable Activate the decapsulation of the channel.

Decapsulator Decapsulator1 Select the decapsulator name.

Label The label is used by the receiver for filtering purposes. The
receiver must interpret the label to see whether or not
packets are available for decapsulation.
When the label is present and it does not match with the
label known in the receiver, the packet is discarded.  
Fill in one of the following options:
• Specific Label = 11:11:11:11:11:11/48 (This is the default
value, change the value according to the label of the
packets you want to receive. It is possible to a receive a 3
or 6 bytes label according to the system setup.)
• Any Label = any ( With this value the receiver filters the
packets which have a label, but with any value for the
label.)
• "" = Leave the field blank (With this value the receiver
only filters the packets where no label is present.)
Note that label is also know as AirMAC (for
example in the Newtec Elevation devices this
term is used).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 260/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.12.3 Configure the TS Decapsulator

15.12.3.1 Configure the TS Decapsulation ISIs

Parameter Description
Name Enter a logical name for the first TS decapsulator.

Enable Enable the decapsulator.

ISI Enter the ISI you want to decapsulate. This must correspond with the ISI
value that has been configured on the Hub site.

Demod ID This corresponds with the demod ID of the demodulator of the

MDM6000.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 261/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.12.3.2 Configure the PIDs Decapsulation

Parameter Description
Name Enter a logical name for the first PIDs decapsulator.

Enable Enable the PID decapsulator.

PID Enter the PID (Program Identifier) you want to decapsulate.

This must correspond with the PID value that has been configured on the Hub
site.

ISI Select one of the available ISI decapsulator names.

The PID you want to filter out must exist on this decapsulator.

Protocol Here you have the possibility to overrule the default protocol that has been
selected under the general decapsulation settings. Refer to
Decapsulation General Settings on page 257.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 262/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.12.3.3 Configure the Channels

» Click Add to add a Channel.

Parameter Description
Name Indicate the channel that you want to decapsulate.

Enable Activate the decapsulation of the channel.

PID Select one of the available PID decapsulators. This to indicate to what
decapsulator this channel must be linked.

Label The label is used by the receiver for filtering purposes. The receiver must
interpret the label to see whether or not packets are available for decapsulation.
When the label is present and it does not match with the label known in the
receiver, the packet is discarded.
Fill in one of the following options:
• Specific Label = 11:11:11:11:11:11/48 (This is the default value, change the
value according to the label of the packets you want to receive. It is possible
to a receive a 3 or 6 bytes label according to the system setup.).
• Any Label = any (Enter this value if a label is required to receive the packets.
The receiver will accept the packages as long as a valid label is present.
• "" = Leave the field blank (The receiver will accept the packets, there will be
no check on the labels. This will be the case when the transmission is done
in broadcast mode.)

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 263/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.12.4 Monitoring
GSE Decapsulation

Parameter Description
Output Bit Rate Displays the bit rate that is forwarded to the terminal.

Forwarded Bytes Displays the number of bytes that are forwarded to the terminal.

Forwarded Packets Displays the number of packets that are forwarded to the terminal.

Dropped Bytes Displays the number of payload bytes that are dropped before
they were send to the terminal.

Dropped Packets Displays the number of payload packets that are dropped before
they were send to the terminal.

Channels
These monitoring settings display the monitoring settings per channel.
When channels are defined per service or remote site it is easy to monitor the decapsulation per
service. In this case, when bytes/packets are dropped for a particular service this is detected in these
monitoring statistics.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 264/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.13 Test Traffic Generator and Monitoring

15.13.1 Test Traffic Generator

The IP traffic generator is a simple feature that allows the user to perform end to end IP tests.
Configure the bit rate of the generator in a range between 30 kbps and 100 Mbps. Once the
generator is enabled, IPerf UDP packets of 1400 bytes are created.
The IP traffic is directly inserted into a specified channel.
The priority of the test IP traffic is, by default, set to the lowest priority (99), this in order not to
compromise other more important traffic!
The destination IP address is by default set to a link local IP address, this to avoid that test IP traffic
is mixed with other normal IP traffic.
The monitoring parameter, Packet Count, shows how much packets that are generated.

The generated test traffic is visualized in the monitoring parameter Packet Count and
it is added in the overall monitoring parameter Forwarded Bit Rate.

The maximum generated test traffic is limited to 40 Mbps

The following figure show how the traffic generator is implemented into the device.

MDM6000 >> Encapsulation >> Test Traffic Generator

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 265/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 266/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.13.2 Test Traffic Monitoring

The test traffic monitoring feature allows to capture the test traffic received by the "remote" device in
end to end IP tests.
The following two scenarios are possible:
• Enable the Test Traffic Monitor on a specific channel and define a destination IP Filter.

By default this is set to a link local address, this to perform exact monitoring
between the modulator and demodulator.

Entering another IP address can impact the normal traffic!

It can also be used to perform diagnostics on the setup, for example to see if a ping to a certain IP address
reaches the demodulator.
When "test" traffic is detected:
– The packet counter increases.
– A check for sequence errors is performed.
– The IPerf protocol is displayed.
– The bit rate is displayed.
• Disable the Test Traffic Monitor.
In this case all traffic is forwarded onto the LAN.
Use an IPerf monitoring tool to capture the traffic on your "own" tool.
Make sure to use UDP mode and listen on UDP port 5001 with the monitoring tool.
The following figures show these scenarios.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 267/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

MDM6000 >> Decapsulation >> Test Traffic Generator

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 268/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.14 Transparent BBF over IP

This feature allows to check on invalid baseband frames and forward these frames as BBF over IP
out towards a proper decapsulator that can handle the invalid frames.
When enabled the following is detected:
• CRC-8 Handling Errors: Some malicious user could corrupt the value of the CRC-8 byte and
inject hidden traffic.
A regular demodulator would drop frames with uncorrectable frames, which would then go
unnoticed. A "hacked" demodulator could then be programmed to still output those specific
corrupted frames.
The Transparent BBFoIP option on the MDM6000 will output even the frames that have CRC-8
errors and increment the monitoring parameter "CRC-8 Errors" in order to signal this.
• Non-zero padding bytes: A way to hide data is to use the padding data that should normally
consist of all zeros.
A regular demodulator would strip the zero padding. The Transparent BBF over IP feature allows
you to not strip the zero padding and transparently output it with the rest of the frame. The
monitoring parameter "Non-zero padding" is incremented to signal this.
A particular case in the non-zero padding, is the DFL handling.
Some malicious user could set the DFL (Data Frame Length) to zero but still insert data into the
frames.

The check on the invalid frames is performed in the BBF over IP Out block.
Refer to the following figure:

Proceed as follows:

» Enable the BBF over IP Out block.

» Configure the destination IP Address and destination UDP port.

» Enable Invalid Frames.

(When enabling this feature, baseband frames with CRC-8 Errors and baseband frames with
Non-zero padding are detected and forwarded as BBF over IP out towards the proper
decapsulator.)

When enabled, the BBF over IP packets are to be handled by an external

(non-Newtec) processing equipment. The NOP1760 cannot process the transparent
BBFs.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 269/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The following monitoring counters are available:

• CRC-8 Errors: Counts the number of forwarded packets, with a CRC-8 error in the baseband
frame header.
• Non-zero Padding: Counts the number of forwarded packets, with non-zero padding.

MDM6000 >> BBF over IP Out >> Invalid Frames

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 270/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.15 In-band Remote Management

Use this feature to manage remote devices over the satellite link.
A user plane configuration model is introduced allowing the operator to manage remote Newtec
devices but also other third party equipment.
The configuration offers the full flexibility of the user plane including ACM.
The configuration is done via the existing management model for user traffic. The user traffic
management model is extended as follows:
• The classification expression in the encapsulator is extended, to contain classify traffic from a
different virtual network:
"vnet management and ip4 dst host 1.2.3.4" is an example how you can select traffic from the
management network.
• The decapsulation channel has a new attribute, the "virtual network".
By default the traffic network is used. When doing remote mgmt, you have to specify the
"management" virtual network.

The following figure shows a principle drawing of the remote management feature in a point to point
link.

The remote management feature only works in a Layer 3 setup! (The data traffic plane
can be in Layer 2 or Layer 3.)

Make sure that during configuration the "temporary Mgmt PC" on the remote site is in
the same subnet as the MDM6000. When the "temporary Mgmt PC" is in a different
subnet the connection is lost when the Mgmt Gateway of the MDM6000 is set to
0.0.0.0.
(Note: the gateway is set to 0.0.0.0 because you want to route the mgmt traffic to the
satellite.)

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 271/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

In this case we assume:

• That a the data traffic plane is already up and running. (The data path is visualized above the
dashed yellow line.)
The management plane is drawn below the dashed yellow line. The data traffic and management
plane are in a different subnet and this way completely separated from one another!
• That the BBF Encapsulation protocol is used.
• That the carrier settings are configured correctly.

15.15.1 How to Configure the In-band Management Feature

15.15.1.1 Hub Site

» Make a Mgmt IP connection between the Mgmt PC and the MDM6000.

Note: Make sure that the Mgmt PC and MDM6000 Mgmt port are in the same subnet or that the
default gateway is configured correctly on the MDM6000 (see previous figure,
Introduction on page 271 ).

» Configure the Encapsulation block of the MDM6000.

» Enable the encapsulation block.

» Configure the BBF encapsulation ISI --> Define on what ISI you want to insert the encapsulated
Mgmt IP packets.

» Configure the BBF encapsulation channel ---> Create a channel to transport the shaped Mgmt IP
packets, including the label.
Note: the label is important for filtering purposes on the remote site.

» Configure the traffic shaping node --> Create a shaping node, the Mgmt IP packets for the
remote will be shaped by this node.

» Configure the traffic classification rule --> filter the Mgmt IP packets for 10.0.2.253/24, the
classification rule looks as follows "vnet management and ip dst host 10.0.2.253/24" or vnet
management and ip dst net 10.0.2.0/24".

Note: using the "vnet management and IP dst net x.x.x.0/24" classification rule allows you to
manage other remote devices in the same subnet

For more information on classification rules see Appendix - Classification Expressions on page 312.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 272/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.15.1.2 Remote Site

» Make a Mgmt IP connection between the Mgmt PC and the MDM6000.

Note: Make sure that the Mgmt PC and MDM6000 Mgmt port are in the same subnet. The
default gateway must be set to 0.0.0.0!

» Enable the decapsulation block

» Configure the decapsulation ISI, this must be the same as the one defined on the hub site.
(Selecting the correct input stream identifier).

» Configure the decapsulation channel.

» Make sure to filter the correct label.

» Specify the virtual network, being Management, this way the IP packets are forwarded towards
your remote mgmt PC!

15.15.2 Example
In this example we consider a "standard" point to point setup. The traffic setup is already in use as
displayed in the following figure.

In this setup, the shaping tree consists of one node below the root node (Node Remote MDM4),
denoting the maximum bandwidth for that node, with additional nodes below for the different rules
created.
To perform remote management over the air, create a separate Mgmt traffic plane by configuring the
encapsulator and decapsulator on the hub and remote site.
In a normal point to point case only one ISI is configured.
To do remote Mgmt we need a separate "mgmt" encapsulation channel, a separate "mgmt" shaping
node and a classification expression that is used to capture all mgmt IP packets.
(There is no need for a finer bandwidth control.)

On the hub site

Configure the encapsulator in such a way that Mgmt IP packets, that are available on the Mgmt port,
for the remote site are filtered and forwarded to the remote site.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 273/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

On the remote site

Configure the decapsulator in such a way that the Mgmt IP packets are decapsulated and made
available on the Mgmt port.
To do this the decapsulator must be able to make a distinction between traffic and management IP
packets. Once the distinction is made the Mgmt IP packets are made available on the Mgmt IP port
of the MDM6000

The following figure shows the traffic and mgmt plane.

15.15.2.1 Configure the Hub Site

Navigate to:

MDM6000 >> Encapsulation

Settings

» Enable the Encapsualtion block

» Add the Mgmt-channel

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 274/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

» Add the appropriate nodes:

– Node-Remote-MDM4 (parent node is root)
– trafnode (to capture data traffic) and mgmtnode (to capture mgmt traffic)

Note that the Node-Remote-MDM4 becomes the parent node for the trafnode and
mgmtnode.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 275/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

» Add the classification rules

– Traffic classification "ip4 DST net 10.203.0.0/24" (link this classification rule to the trafnode)
– Mgmt classification "vnet management and ip4 DST host 10.253.2.64" (link this classification
rule to the mgmtnode)

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 276/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.15.2.2 Configure the Remote Site

Navigate to:

MDM6000 >> Decapsulation

» Check the decapsulation ISI;

» Add the decapasulation channel (mgmt-channel)

– Set the correct label
– Select the correct virtual network = Management!

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 277/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.16 Bandwidth Cancellation

Bandwidth cancellation is a technique which is based on echo cancellation. This technique allows
two parties to use the same carrier (characterized by frequency band, polarization, space,
propagation direction, ...) at the same time.
As both parties know their own information they have sent, they are able to "cancel" their own echo
from the received counter party signal. Echo cancellation is based on some form of correlation
technique to extract information of interest which is submersed in "other information" of non interest.
The main requirements to perform bandwidth cancellation are:
• The ground station must be able to see its own echo.
• Both terminals must be in the same satellite footprint.

Bandwidth cancellation is mainly used to gain satellite capacity. Satellite capacity is gained by
transmitting the forward and return carrier of the satellite link in the same frequency band.
In a typical satellite link, the forward and return carriers exist next to each other.
Applying bandwidth cancellation can lead to a reduction in output power and bandwidth gain.
This is displayed in the following figure:

Bandwidth cancellation brings most gain in symmetrical links! Please do a link budget
calculation up front to see what is possible.

Please refer to the Bandwidth Cancellation Link budget Considerations document.

When using a temporary license to evaluate the Bandwidth Cancellation feature be

aware that the license is activated on device level and not on feature level.
Meaning that the license expires when the device is active, even if BWC is not used.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 278/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.16.1 Block Diagram

The following figure depicts a point-to-point bandwidth cancellation link where the carriers from the
"Local" and "Remote" modem overlap.
The “Local” modem uplinks a signal L and receives an aggregate signal AL that consists of the
desired signal Rd from the “Remote” modem and its own uplinked signal Ld (with d indicating that
the signal has a satellite delay).

The BWC function (depicted in the following figure) receives a copy of the uplinked signal L and the
received signal AL = Rd + Ld. Both signals are used to determine the amplitude, frequency and time
shift the uplink signal experienced when passing over the satellite link.
With this information a signal Ld is generated. This signal Ld is subtracted from the aggregate
received signal AL. The output is the desired signal Rd, the signal coming from the remote modem
which is then demodulated.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 279/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.16.2 Configuration and Monitoring Parameters

The configuration parameters, to enable bandwidth cancellation, are located in the demodulator
block of the MDM6000 modem.
Make sure the input frequency of the demodulator is configured on the receiving frequency.
Enable bandwidth cancellation to start canceling the local carrier and extracting the remote carrier.
Next to enabling the bandwidth cancellation function, set the parameters so that the local carrier is
canceled out as good as possible.
The better the local carrier is canceled the higher the bandwidth gain and power reduction.

Navigate to:

MDM6000 >> Demodulator >> Bandwidth Cancellation

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 280/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 281/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description

Enable Enable or disable bandwidth cancellation.

Expected Round Trip Set this to the round trip delay the carrier (that is uplinked, received and
Delay canceled out) will experience. The closer this value is to the actual delay,
the faster the canceling will start. Set this value to 0 when doing a
back-to-back test.
A typical value is 240 ms.

Round Trip Delay Enter the round trip delay search window that the cancellation function
Search Window uses to try to acquire full lock.
The advised starting value is set to 20 ms but once the actual round trip
delay is known, the search range can be decreased. This to reduce the
search time and speed up full lock. However, keep some range to allow
for delay due to Doppler effects.

Local Carrier Rx In most cases this parameter can be set to 0 MHz.

Freq Offset Because most use cases are symmetrical links where the transmission
between hub and remote site are the same.
In non symmetrical use cases the carrier that we wish to cancel can have
a different frequency than the carrier we want to receive.
The demodulator sees two carriers at its input:
• Remote Carrier: The carrier we whish to receive (this is the
demodulator input frequency). This frequency is called the remote
since it is sent by another modem.
• Local Carrier: The carrier sent by this modem and also received by
this modem. Its receive frequency can be different than the frequency
of the remote carrier. The difference between both is the local carrier
center frequency offset.
This is indicated in the following figure:

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 282/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description

Local Carrier Freq The frequency search window in which the demodulator searches for the
Search Window received local carrier. By observing the local carrier center frequency
offset, this value can be decreased to reduce the search time and speed
up full lock.

Local Spectral In case an upconverter or the satellite transponder inverses the

Inversion spectrum of the carrier, the cancellation function needs to re-inverse the
spectrum prior to actual cancellation. In case automatic is used, the
canceller toggles continuously between inverted and direct spectrum. In
order to speed up lock time, observe the detected inversion in the
monitoring parameter "local spectral inversion" and set the detected
inversion here.
The following figure is an example of a converted L-band frequency.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 283/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description

Bandwidth Mode This parameter sets the range of parameters of the acquisition loops.
Use the bandwidth mode to balance the search range versus the
acquisition time.
• Normal: Standard settings for the acquisition loops.
• Robust: Extended ranges of the parameters in the acquisition loops.
Use the this setting to cope with bigger uncertainties but potentially
increases lock time.
• Fine: When all parameters are accurately known and set and there is
no change over time, use the fine mode to achieve the fastest lock
time.

Monitoring

Parameter Description

State The state of the bandwidth cancellation function can be in one of the
following states:
• Off, in case bandwidth cancellation is disabled.
• Searching, when in the process of acquiring lock.
• Locked when the cancellation function is fully operational.

Round Trip Delay The measured round trip delay the carrier (that is uplinked and again
received) experiences.
Use this value to fine tune the control parameter "Expected round trip
delay". The round trip delay can slightly change due to Doppler and the
satellite moving in its "box".

Local to Total Carrier The measured ratio between the total received power at the input of the
Power Ratio modem and the received local carrier power.

Local to Remote The measured ratio between the remote carrier power and the received
Carrier Power Ratio local carrier power.

Local Carrier Level The power of the received local carrier (that is uplinked then received)
prior to actual cancellation.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 284/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Local Carrier The measured symbol rate of the local carrier (that is uplink, received
Tracked Symbol rate and canceled out).

Local Carrier The difference between the set local carrier carrier frequency and the
Frequency Offset actual detected local carrier frequency.

Local Carrier The spectral inversion of the local carrier (that is uplinked and again
Spectral Inversion received) that is applied. This can be either have been set manually or
detected automatically (by using the "automatic" setting in the "Local
carrier spectral inversion" control parameter. Once the spectral inversion
is know it is advised to set it manual to the correct value in order to
reduced cancellation lock time.

In case traffic is not sufficient random a periodic demodulator lock loss might occur.
In such case one should configure a physical layer scrambling signature both on the
modulator as well as on the demodulator with an identical non-zero value.
See section: Physical Layer Scrambling on page 173 .

15.16.3 Practical Use Case

In the following example we consider a point to point link between a hub and a remote site.
In this example we consider a symmetrical point to point link with the following characteristics:

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 285/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

By using bandwidth cancellation it is possible to gain bandwidth and output power as displayed in
the following figure.

As indicated in the following figure both output frequencies (on the hub site and the remote site) are
set to 1400 MHz.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 286/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

In this example we make use of two MDM6000 devices who are connected back to
back with each other. This results in a time delay that is set to 0.

15.16.3.1 Configure the Hub Site

Proceed as follows to configure the bandwidth cancellation parameters.

» Log in as expert.
(Default credentials: User name: expert Password: expertexpert)

» Open the detailed view of the demodulator.

» Change the Input Frequency from 1428 MHz to 1400 MHz.

» Scroll down to Bandwidth Cancellation.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 287/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

» Complete the parameters.

The Bandwidth Cancellation No Lock alarm is indicated. Proceed to configure the

remote site.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 288/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description

Enable Enable the bandwidth cancellation.

Expected Round Trip Set this to the round trip delay the carrier (that is uplinked, received and
Delay canceled out) will experience. The closer this value is to the actual delay,
the faster the canceling starts.
Set this value to 0 when doing a back-to-back test.

Round Trip Delay Enter the round trip delay search window that the cancellation function
Search Window uses to try to acquire full lock.
The advised starting value is set to 20 ms but once the actual round trip
delay is known, the search range can be decreased. This to reduce the
search time and speed up full lock. However, keep some range to allow
for delay due to Doppler effects.

Local Carrier Rx Enter the local carrier Rx frequency offset.

Freq Offset
0 MHz in this example.

Local Carrier Rx The frequency search window in which the demodulator searches for the
Freq Search Window received local carrier. By observing the local carrier center frequency
offset, this value can be decreased to reduce the search time and speed
up full lock.

Local Carrier In case an upconverter or the satellite transponder inverses the

Spectral Inversion spectrum of the carrier, the cancellation function needs to re-inverse the
spectrum prior to actual cancellation. In case automatic is used, the
canceler toggles continuously between inverted and direct spectrum.
In order to speed up lock time, observe the detected inversion in the
monitoring parameter "local carrier spectral inversion" and set the
detected inversion here.

Bandwidth Mode This parameter sets the range of parameters of the acquisition loops.
Use the bandwidth mode to balance the search range versus the
acquisition time.
• Normal: Standard settings for the acquisition loops.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 289/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Parameter Description

• Robust: Extended ranges of the parameters in the acquisition loops.

Use the this setting to cope with bigger uncertainties but potentially
increases lock time.
• Fine: When all parameters are accurately known and set and there is
no change over time, use the fine mode to achieve the fastest lock
time.

15.16.3.2 Configure the Remote Site

Proceed as follows to configure the bandwidth cancellation parameters.

» Log in as expert.

» Open the detailed view of the modulator.

» Change the output frequency to 1400 MHz.

» Open the detailed view of the demodulator.

» Scroll down to Bandwidth Cancellation.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 290/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

» Complete the parameters.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 291/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.17 Layer 2 VLAN Termination

15.17.1 Introduction
Virtual networks allow to transmit for instance several company networks with overlapping IP
address spaces via the same satellite hub or link.
Using L2 access VLAN (L2 forwarding) simplifies the IP configuration between the hub and the
remote sites.
Here we consider two possible ways of working with VLANs:
• The VLAN tag is forwarded towards the remote site and is terminated by the end router.
(to see how the mechanism works please refer to: Appendix - Classification Expressions) on page 312
• The VLAN tag is stripped off before transmission towards the remote site or the VLAN tag is
added upon receiving on the hub site.
In this section we explain the second mechanism, stripping off or adding the VLAN tag.
By doing this the remote site does not require VLAN aware devices.
In practice we create a channel and a VLAN per remote site and link these to one another. This way
the VLAN tag must not be transmitted over satellite.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 292/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.17.2 Access VLAN Mechanism between Hub and Remote Sites

In this example there are three VLAN's. All data traffic from VLAN 1 must be forwarded to remote 1
and all data traffic for VLAN 2 must be forwarded to remote 2.
Please refer to the following picture:

The following steps are performed in the encapsulator.

1. Data traffic is inserted into the MDM6000
2. The classification rule is applied to filter on, e.g. IP destination address, the IP protocol used or an other
classification expression.
3. The classified traffic is put into a shaping node (Node1 and Node2), where the CIR and PIR is performed.
4. The shaped traffic is inserted into a channel.
Note: Create a channel per VLAN to keep this traffic separated.
Add the Access VLAN tag to filter the VLAN and making the channel a member of that VLAN. (This is a filter
on top of the classification rule).
Note, the VLAN tag is stripped from the IP packet, reducing overhead on the satellite link.
5. The channel (and its content) is encapsulated and an ISI (input stream identifier) is applied.
There are two channels inserted into the ISI.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 293/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Please check the following GUI screenshots:

The following steps are performed in the decapsulator:

To decapsulate the traffic, do the following:
1. Create a decapsulator with ISI 1.
2. Link the incoming channel to the decapsulator (ISI1).

The Access VLAN is only needed on the hub site. When entering a value here, a
VLAN tag is added to the IP header.
.
3. The data traffic is available on the data Ethernet interfaces

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 294/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

15.17.3 Access VLAN Mechanism between Remote and Hub

The following figure shows the mechanism between two remote sites and the hub.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 295/367

Feature Descriptions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The return signals of the remote devices are received by the demodulator in the MDM6000 devices
or MCD6000 device. Once demodulated the traffic is inserted into the decapsulator.
Configure the decapsulator:
1. Create a decapsulator instance and filter out the correct ISI
2. Create a decapsulation channel and link it to the correct decapsulator instance (ISI)
3. Add the access VLAN tag, this way the traffic is forwarded to the correct terminating devices.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 296/367

Appendix - Alarm List MDM6000 Satellite Modem

16 Appendix - Alarm List

The alarm list provides an overview of the different alarms that can occur on the device.
The description of the alarm indicates where the alarm is situated and how the problem can be
solved.
Most alarms are related to one of the functional blocks that exist in the device.
A few alarms can be an aggregation of different sub alarms.
This means that one of the sub alarms must exist before the overall alarm is displayed. When
debugging this overall alarm it is necessary to check the sub alarms as this can exist out of more
than one sub alarm.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 297/367

Appendix - Alarm List MDM6000 Satellite Modem

16.1 Generic Alarms

Alarm Description

Temperature This alarm is raised when the monitored temperature

exceeds 85 °C.

General Device This alarm can be triggered by one of the following alarms:
• Invalid License
• Boot Config Failure
• Temperature
• Modulator DAC Failure
• Modulator No Calibration Data
• Modulator Ref synthesizer failure alarm
• Modulator LO-1 synthesizer failure alarm
• Modulator LO-2 synthesizer failure alarm

General Interface This alarm is raised when an error is reported on an interface

that is used in the data path.
This alarm can be triggered by one of the following alarms:
• Ethernet interface alarm
• Ref Clock No Signal
• Demodulator No PL Lock
• Demodulator No Lock
• Demodulator Input Saturated
• Demodulator LNB Power Control Error

Invalid License This alarm is raised when the license file is not available or
wrongly signed.

Boot Config Failure This alarm is raised when an erroneous boot configuration
was attempted to load and failed.
Check the boot configuration file stored on the device.

Frontpanel Internal Failure This alarm is raised when the front panel communication
failed.

Power Supply Failure This alarm is raised when the power supply (A or B) has
failed.

Fan Failure This is alarm is raised when a fan failure occurs.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 298/367

Appendix - Alarm List MDM6000 Satellite Modem

16.2 Ethernet Interface Alarms

Alarm Description

Eth Data Link Failure This alarm is raised when there is no signal on the
corresponding Ethernet interface.

Eth Data Itf Failure This alarm is raised when a failure is detected on the
Ethernet interface.

Eth Mgmt Link Failure This alarm is raised when there is no signal on the
corresponding Ethernet interface.

Eth Mgmt Itf Failure This alarm is raised when a failure is detected on the
Ethernet interface.

Eth Mgmt Fp Link Failure This alarm is raised when there is no signal on the
corresponding Ethernet interface. (Front Panel)

Eth Data Half Duplex This alarm is raised when an Ethernet interface is in half
duplex mode as a result of a link negotiation.
The alarm is not raised when the Ethernet interface was
forced in half duplex mode by configuration on the device.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 299/367

Appendix - Alarm List MDM6000 Satellite Modem

16.3 BBF over IP Alarms

Alarm Description

BBF over IP General This alarm is raised when there is a general BBF over IP Input
alarm.
This alarm is triggered by one of the following alarms.
• BBF over IP No Input Data
• BBF over IP Buffer Overflow
• BBF over IP Discontinuity alarm
• BBF over IP MODCOD Not Supported

BBF over IP No Input Data This alarm is raised when no input data is received between a
one second time interval for one or more BBF streams.

BBF over IP Buffer Overflow This alarm is raised when the input data buffer for 1 or more
BBF streams is full.

BBF over IP Discontinuity The alarm is raised when the sequence numbers are not
alarm continuous for a specific ntS2BBF input stream for five sec.

BBF over IP MODCOD Not This alarm is raised when Baseband frames are dropped due
Supported to receiving a non licensed MODCOD.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 300/367

Appendix - Alarm List MDM6000 Satellite Modem

16.4 Modulator Alarms

Alarm Description

Modulator General This alarm is raised when there is a general modulator alarm.
• Modulator No Input Signal
• Modulator Buffer Underflow
• Modulator Buffer Overflow
• Modulator no physical layer sync alarm
• Modulator No BaseBand frame sync alarm
• Modulator DAC Failure
• Modulator No Calibration Data

Modulator No Input Signal This alarm is raised when no input signal is detected at the
input of the modulator.

Modulator No Input Frame This alarm indicates loss of input framing on the incoming data
Sync of the modulator.

Modulator Buffer Underflow This alarm is raised when the input data buffer to the
modulator is empty.

Modulator Buffer Overflow This alarm is raised when the input data buffer of the
modulator is full.

Modulator Synthesizer This alarm is raised when there is a failure with a synthesizer.
Failure It indicates a malfunction of the synthesizer hardware, which
generates the IFL carrier frequency.
The presence of this alarm suppresses the IFL transmit output
of the modulator.
• Modulator Ref synthesizer failure alarm
• Modulator LO-1 synthesizer failure alarm
• Modulator LO-2 synthesizer failure alarm

Modulator DAC Failure This alarm is raised when there is a general DAC Failure.

Modulator No Calibration This alarm is raised when there is no Calibration data

Data available for the modulator.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 301/367

Appendix - Alarm List MDM6000 Satellite Modem

16.5 Reference Clock Alarms

Alarms Description

Ref Clock No Signal This alarm is raised when no signal is detected on the
reference clock input connector.

Ref Clock No Lock This alarm is raised when the device cannot lock on the
reference clock.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 302/367

Appendix - Alarm List MDM6000 Satellite Modem

16.6 Demodulator Alarms

Alarms Description

General Demodulator This alarm is raised when there is a general Demodulator

alarm.
This alarm is triggered when of the following alarms
• Demodulator No Lock
• Demodulator LNB Power Control Error

Demodulator Internal Error This alarm is raised when there is a internal error
Demodulator alarm.

Demodulator Input Saturated The demodulator input is saturated.

The L-band input level is too high, this means that the input
level exceeds -10 dBm aggregated over L-Band.

Demodulator No PL Lock This alarm indicates that the demodulator cannot lock to the
physical layer headers.
This alarm can occur when the demodulation mode is
incorrect, for example S2 Extensions is selected instead of
DVB-S2. In this case check the demodulation mode.

Demodulator No Lock This alarm is raised when the demodulator cannot lock on the
received carrier.

Demodulator LNB Power This alarm is raised when an error occurs in the LNB power
Control Error supply. For example when a short circuit is present on the
connector. Verify the connection to the LNB power supply.

Demodulator decoder This alarm is raised when the decoder is overloaded.

overloaded This alarm can be raised when MODCOD 64APSK 90/180 is
selected and the symbol rate is set higher than 64Mbaud.
This because this MODCOD is limited to 64 Mbaud.
To avoid this alarm it is possible to change the MODCOD
setting.

Demodulator Buffer Overflow This alarm is raised when an internal buffer overflow is
detected. The baseband frames arriving from three different
demodulator boards are first stored in a buffer. This because
the device processes one baseband frame at a time.
An overflow is detected when the aggregated rate of the three
demodulator boards is too high for the demodulator buffer.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 303/367

Appendix - Alarm List MDM6000 Satellite Modem

16.7 Alarms: BUC Power Alarms

Alarms Description

BUC Power Minimal Current This alarm is raised when measured current for block up
converter power is below specified minimal value.

BUC Power Overload This alarm is raised when an overload is detected.

BUC Power Supply Failure This alarm is raised when 24 V/48 V supply is not operational

BUC Power Hardware This alarm is raised when communication with block up
Failure converter power unit is lost.

BUC Power To Much This alarm is raised when there is too much output
Capacitance capacitance connected.

BUC Power Short Circuit This alarm is raised when short circuit is detected.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 304/367

Appendix - Overview of the Used Technologies MDM6000 Satellite Modem

17 Appendix - Overview of the Used

Technologies

17.1 DVB-S2, DVB-S2X and S2 Extensions

17.1.1 DVB-S2 Standard

The DVB-S2 standard offers 28 MODCODs and supports up to 32APSK9/10 FEC codes. The
standard supports by default the following roll off factors 20%, 25% and 35%.
The following figure shows the DVB-S2 efficiency diagram for a roll-off factor of 20%.

Refer to the DVB-S2 standard: ETSI EN 302 307.

By adding the Newtec's Clean Channel Technology the efficiency increased up to 15%.
Clean channel technology mainly provides lower roll off factors, 5%, 10% or 15% resulting in better
spectral shape.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 305/367

Appendix - Overview of the Used Technologies MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The following figure shows the improvement when clean channel technology is added.

17.1.2 DVB-S2X Standard

This is the new enhanced DVB specification. The new standard allows for using the lower roll offs
(5%, 10% 15%).
Furthermore the DVB-S2X standard introduces a finer MODCOD granularity up to 113 MODCODs
and FEC codes up to 256APSK 11/15 in order to improve the performance of the DVB-S2 standard.
The new standard also includes three frame sizes (normal, short and medium) and it adds additional
standard scrambling sequences.
This standard also optimizes for linear and non-linear satellite links.
Two sets of MODCODs are available:
• One set of MODCODs is optimized for multi-carrier operation of the transponder (linear channel
operation). In multi-carrier operation, the transponder can not be saturated and a given back-off
is needed to avoid intermodulation between the individual carriers in the transponder.
• The second set of MODCODs is optimized for single carrier operation which allows to saturated
the transponder (non-linear channel).

Note that DVB-S2X receivers are also able to receive DVB-S2.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 306/367

Appendix - Overview of the Used Technologies MDM6000 Satellite Modem

The following figure shows the efficiency fo the DVB-S2X standard compared to the DVB-S2
standard.

Refer to DVB website to download the DVB-S2X standard.

https://www.dvb.org/standards/dvb-s2x

17.1.3 S2 Extensions
S2 Extensions is Newtec4s proprietary modulation technology. The S2 Extensions modulation
technology combined with Clean Channel Technology delivers gains up to 37% compared to
standard DVB-S2 modulation.
The main features of the S2 Extensions technology are:
• Finer MODCOD granularity: There are 87 MODCODs (compared to the 28 MODCODs in
DVB-S2).
• Better MODCOD performance: FEC codes and modulations have been redesigned in order to
improve the performance of the existing DVB-S2 MODCODs.
• Optimization for linear and non-linear satellite links: Two sets of MODCODs are available:
– One set of MODCODs is optimized for multi-carrier operation of the transponder (linear
channel operation). In multi-carrier operation, the transponder can not be saturated and a
given back-off is needed to avoid intermodulation between the individual carriers in the
transponder.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 307/367

Appendix - Overview of the Used Technologies MDM6000 Satellite Modem

– The second set of MODCODs is optimized for single carrier operation which allows to
saturated the transponder (non-linear channel).
The following figure shows the efficiency of the DVB-S2X standard compared to Newtec's
proprietary S2 Extensions and to the DVB-S2 standard.

Newtec S2 Extensions DVB-S2X

• Closed Networks • Open Networks

• Security by Obscurity • Interoperability
• High Efficiency • Highest Efficiency
• Lower Capital Expenditures (CAPEX) • Premium Value

Typical Applications Typical Applications

• (Contribution) • Government and Defense
• IP Trunking • Contribution
• IP Backhaul • Distribution
• VSAT return links. • Exchange

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 308/367

Appendix - Overview of the Used Technologies MDM6000 Satellite Modem

17.2 Noise and Distortion Estimator (Node)

NoDE (Noise & Distortion Estimator) simplifies ground station operation activities and enables an
efficient usage of transponders. NoDE is a unique and innovative tool that simplifies ground station
operation activities by providing a means to monitor the quality of the satellite link. It performs a
continuous and accurate measurement of the noise margin and the amount of non-linear distortion
on the received satellite signal. NoDE allows operators to easily fine tune their satellite links to their
optimal operational point under any circumstances. Regular fine tuning of the satellite link
parameters will increase the efficiency of the transponder and at the same time provide financial
benefits.
In addition, NoDE enables the operator to view the linear and non-linear effects from changes in the
uplink power. It can help to prevent errors in operations such as the addition of too much power and
distortion that could lead to the total loss of the communication links.
NoDE is the perfect tool to provide operators full control over transmission performance when linear
and non-linear distortions are present. It enables higher modulation schemes such as 16APSK and
32 APSK and helps operators to get the most out of their transponder.

17.2.1 How Does Node Work

In digital satellite communications, the energy per symbol related to the noise power spectral density
(Es/No) is an important parameter used to determine the quality of the transmission. The Es/No
measurement at the receiver side needs a certain threshold to ensure an error-free transmission.
The following figure shows PER versus Es/No.

It is commonly accepted that a transmission is considered as error-free when the PER (Packet Error
Rate) at the reception side is below 10-7. For each DVB-S2 MODCOD, as shown in , a minimum
value (Es/No)QEF guarantees quasi error free transmission.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 309/367

Appendix - Overview of the Used Technologies MDM6000 Satellite Modem

In a linear environment, as described in , the Link Margin Estimates (LME) provided with or without
NoDE is identical. They correspond with the difference between the channels Es/No and the
(Es/No)QEF of the corresponding MODCOD, which is the real operation margin of the transmission.

When non-linear distortion is present, the real link margin is decreased and is no longer equal to the
difference between the measured Es/No value and (Es/No)QEF. NoDE calculates the amount of
distortion present on the received signal, then corrects the minimum Es/No value to obtain quasi
error-free transmission by a delta Δ that takes into account the effect of the distortion. In a non-linear
environment, as described in , NoDE enables the measurement of an accurate Link Margin
Estimation.
By providing the operator with an accurate estimation of the Real Link Margin, NoDE prevents the
link being operated in a region where the performance is unpredictable and only marginally stable.
By observing the evolution of (Es/No)QEF + ∆ functioning in a variation of the uplink power, NoDE
can also help the operator to find the optimal operational point of the transponder without
interrupting the transmission.
To get an overview of the statistics and the "calculation" of the link margin navigate to the following:

MDM6000 >> Demodulator >> MODCOD Statistics

The parameters Link Margin and C/ND provide information on the current link quality for a certain
MODCOD. FlexACM makes use of these statistics to define whether a new MODCOD must be
selected.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 310/367

Appendix - Overview of the Used Technologies MDM6000 Satellite Modem

17.3 Wideband
The MDM6000 supports baudrates from 1 Mbaud up to 72 Mbaud. It also supports bidirectional
transmission up to 2 times 375 Mbps, or an unprecedented total bitrate of 750 Mbps.

17.4 Clean Channel Technology®

Newtec's Clean Channel Technology® is a combination of improved roll-off factors for DVB-S2 and
advanced filtering technologies to allow optimal carrier spacing. The combination can bring
efficiency gains up to 15%.
Clean channel technology consists out of the following three effects.
A first effect in the Clean Channel Technology is applying a smaller Roll-Off (RO) percentage than
currently used in the DVB-S2 standard. In the DVB-S2 standard the 20% and 25% roll-off factor
percentages are common. Basically this means that these percentages need to be added to the
desired bandwidth over satellite. Reducing these roll-off factors to 5%, 10% or 15% results in a
direct gain in bandwidth. This is reflected in the following formula:
Occupied bandwidth = Symbol Rate*(1+roll-off factor). The following figure compares 20% roll-off
with 5% roll-off.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 311/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

18 Appendix - Classification Expressions

IP traffic entering the MDM6000 is taken in on the encapsulator block where the traffic is first being
classified (filtered).
Use classification expressions to perform this filtering.
Filter all incoming packets based on expressions that match any field of an incoming packet
• * IP addresses, TOS byte, protocol, etc.
Expressions can be ANDed (&&), ORed (||), negated (!), brackets can be used to group different
expressions.

expression=expression and expression expression=(expression) expression=protocol

expression=expression && expression
expression=field value expression=protocol field
expression=expression or expression
value expression=always expression=never
expression=expression || expression
expression=not expression
expression=!expression

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 312/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Use the syntax as displayed in the following table:

ETHERNET ARP

ethernet dst ether <mac> arp operation <operation>

ethernet src ether <mac> arp src ether <mac>
ethernet unicast arp dst ether <mac>
ethernet unicast-this-host arp src host <ip4address>
ethernet unicast-other-host arp src net <ip4address>-<ip4address>
ethernet multicast arp src net <ip4address> mask <ip4netmask>
ethernet broadcast arp src net <ip4address>/<ip4bits>
ethernet this-host arp dst host <ip4address>
ethernet protocol <ethertype> arp dst net <ip4address>-<ip4address>
ethernet vlan/vlan2/vlan3 <tag> arp dst net <ip4address> mask <ip4netmask>
ethernet vlan-priority/vlan-priority2/vlan-priority3 arp dst net <ip4address>/<ip4bits>
<prio>
ethernet vlan-type/vlan-type2/vlan-type3
<ethertype>

IPv4 IPv6
ip4 tos <tos> ip6 class <tos>
ip4 dscp <dscp> ip6 dscp <dscp>
ip4 protocol <protocol> ip6 label <flowlabel>
ip4 src host <ip4address> ip6 protocol <protocol>
ip4 src net <ip4address>-<ip4address> ip6 src host <ip6address>
ip4 src net <ip4address> mask <ip4netmask> ip6 src net <ip6address>-<ip6address>
ip4 src net <ip4address>/<ip4bits> ip6 src net <ip6address>/<ip6bits>
ip4 dst host <ip4address> ip6 dst host <ip6address>
ip4 dst net <ip4address>-<ip4address> ip6 dst net <ip6address>-<ip6address>
ip4 dst net <ip4address> mask <ip4netmask> ip6 dst net <ip6address>/<ip6bits>
ip4 dst net <ip4address>/<ip4bits> ip6 src scope <ip6scope>
ip4 unicast ip6 src scope <ip6scope>-<ip6scope>
ip4 multicast ip6 dst scope <ip6scope>
ip4 broadcast ip6 dst scope <ip6scope>-<ip6scope>
ip4 ah ip6 unicast
ip4 esp ip6 multicast
ip6 ah
ip6 esp

IGMP UDP

igmp type <igmptype> udp src port <port>

igmp host <ip4address> udp src port <port>-<port>
igmp net <ip4address>-<ip4address> udp dst port <port>
igmp net <ip4address> mask <ip4netmask> udp dst port <port>-<port>
igmp net <ip4address>/<ip4bits> udp rtp-detection <rtpdetect>

TCP
tcp src port <port>
tcp src port <port>-<port>
tcp dst port <port>
tcp dst port <port>-<port>

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 313/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

ICMP4
icmp4 type <icmp4type>
icmp4 code <icmp4code>

ICMP6
icmp6 type <icmp6type>
icmp6 code <icmp6code>
icmp6-neighbor-solicitation target
<ip6address>
icmp6-neighbor-advertisement target
<ip6address>

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 314/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

18.1 Layer 2 Examples

18.1.1 Frequently used Layer 2 Expressions

The following table provides an overview on frequently used Layer 2 expressions.
The first three expressions are explained in more detail to provide more info on the mechanism.

Expression Description

all This is the default route settings, captures all incoming

packets.
(Refer to Expression: all on page 316)

vlan 620 Filter out all traffic with VLAN ID in the VLAN TAG set
to 620.
(Refer to Expression: Layer 2 VLAN ID on page 318)

vlan 620 and ip4 dst net 192.168.5.0/24 Capture all packets in VLAN 620 and with a dst ip
address in the network 192.168.5.0/24
(Refer to
Expression: VLAN ID and Destination IP on page 320)

vlan 610 and vlan-priority 2 Capture all packets in VLAN 620 with the PRI (priority)
bits in the VLAN header set to the decimal value 2.

vlan 610 and not (ethernet protocol arp) All packets in VLAN 610 but not the ARP protocol.

arp operation request Specific capture expression to capture all ARP

requests

arp operation reply Specific capture expression to capture all ARP replies.

Ethernet protocol arp Specific capture expression to capture all packets

belonging to the ARP protocol

ethernet vlan-priority 7 Capture all packets with PRI bits in the VLAN header
set to dec value 7 (decimal value 7).

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 315/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

18.1.2 Expression: All

The following picture shows the basic expression "all".
Use this expression to capture all incoming packets.

The previous figure shows that IP traffic, with different IP destination addresses, is forwarded
towards the remote site.

Have a look at the following example video to see how to configure the Encapsulator.
classification expression L2 all.mp4

The following steps are taken:

Transmit
1. IP traffic is entering the MDM6000.
2. The traffic is inserted into the encapsulator
3. The IP traffic is filtered according to the classification rule.
In this case "all", all IP packets are further processed by the shaping tree (Trafnode and Node Remote
MDM4).
4. The shaped traffic is inserted into a channel (Channel Default).
5. A label can be assigned to the shaped traffic
6. The shaped traffic is linked to a specific Input Stream Identifier (ISI8)
7. The shaped traffic is modulated and transmitted.

Receive
1. The shaped traffic is received and demodulated on the remote site.
2. The traffic of ISI8 is inserted into the decapsulator.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 316/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

3. The decapsulator filters on the specified label (when a label is specified on the transmit site).
4. The traffic is forwarded towards their destination IP addresses.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 317/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

18.1.3 Expression: Layer 2 VLAN ID

The following picture shows the expression "VLAN ID".
Use this expression to capture all incoming packets with a specific VLAN TAG.
All other incoming packets are dropped.

The previous figure shows that IP traffic, with different VLAN ID tags, is forwarded towards a VLAN
on the remote site.
The following steps are taken:

Transmit
1. IP traffic is entering the MDM6000.
2. The traffic is inserted into the encapsulator.
3. The IP traffic is filtered according to the classification rule.
In this case "VLANID", IP packets with the VLAN ID tag 620 are further processed by the shaping tree
(trafnode and Node Remote MDM4).
4. IP traffic with an other "VLANID" is dropped!
5. The shaped traffic (vlan 620) is inserted into a channel (Channel Default).
6. A label can be assigned to the shaped traffic.
7. The shaped traffic is linked to a specific Input Stream Identifier (ISI8)
8. The shaped traffic is modulated and transmitted.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 318/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Please check the following screenshot:

Receive
1. The shaped traffic (VLAN 620) is received and demodulated on the remote site.
2. The traffic of ISI8 is inserted into the decapsulator.
3. The decapsulator filters on the specified label (when a label is specified on the transmit site).
4. The traffic is forwarded towards the devices with the same VLAN ID.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 319/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

18.1.4 Expression: VLAN ID and Destination IP

The following picture shows the expression "VLAN ID" and ip4 DST net 10.101.0.23.
Use this expression to capture all incoming packets with a specific VLAN TAG and for a specific IP
address.
All other incoming packets are dropped.

The previous figure shows that IP traffic, with different VLAN ID tags, is forwarded towards a VLAN
on the remote site.
The following steps are taken:

Transmit
1. IP traffic is entering the MDM6000.
2. The traffic is inserted into the encapsulator.
3. The IP traffic is filtered according to the classification rule.
In this case "VLANID", IP packets with the VLAN ID tag 620 and ip4 DST net 10.101.0.23 are further
processed by the shaping tree (Trafnode and Node Remote MDM4).
4. IP traffic with an other "VLANID" and other ip4 dst is dropped!
5. The shaped traffic (vlan 620 and ip4 dst net 10.101.0.23) is inserted into a channel (Channel Default).
6. A label can be assigned to the shaped traffic.
7. The shaped traffic is linked to a specific Input Stream Identifier (ISI8).
8. The shaped traffic is modulated and transmitted.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 320/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Please check the following screenshot:

Receive
1. The shaped traffic (VLAN620) is received and demodulated on the remote site.
2. The traffic of ISI8 is inserted into the decapsulator.
3. The decapsulator filters on the specified label (when a label is specified on the transmit site).
4. The traffic is forwarded towards the devices with the same VLAN ID.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 321/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

18.2 Layer 3 Examples

18.2.1 Frequently used Layer 3 Expressions

The following table provides an overview on frequently used Layer 3 expressions.
The first three expressions are explained in more detail to provide more info on the mechanism.

Expression Description

ip4 dst net 0.0.0.0/0 Default capture expression for all IPv4 packets.
(Refer to Expression: ip4 dst net 0.0.0.0/0 on page 323)

ip4 dst net 10.10.10.0/24 and protocol Used to filter out icmp messages and enabling to
icmp prioritize those messages (used frequently as SLA
reference).
(Refer to Expression: ip4 dst  10.10.10.0/24 on page 325)

ip4 dst net 10.4.1.0/24 Capture a certain (sub)net.

(Refer to
Expression: ip4 dst net 10.10.10.0/24 and protocol icmp on p
age 327 )

ip4 dst host 10.4.1.10 Capture a certain destination host.

ip4 protocol icmp Capture on icmp protocol.

ip4 protocol <protocol number> capture on the protocol defined by the protocol
number.

ip4 dscp <dscp value> capture on a certain dscp value set in the IP header.

ip4 src host 1.2.3.4 capture on a specific source IP address.

ip dst net 10.6.4.0/24 or ip dst host Nested expression capturing packets with destination
192.168.1.99 or ip dst net iP address set within one of the mentioned subnets.
192.168.1.0/24

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 322/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

18.2.2 Expression: ip4 dst net 0.0.0.0/0

The following picture shows the basic L3 expression "ip4 dst net 0.0.0.0/0".
Use this expression to capture all IPv4 packets.

The previous figure shows that IP traffic, with different IP destination addresses, is forwarded
towards the remote site.
The following steps are taken:

Transmit
1. IP traffic is entering the MDM6000.
2. The traffic is inserted into the encapsulator.
3. The IP traffic is filtered according to the classification rule.
In this case "ip4 dst net 0.0.0.0/0", all IPv4 packets are further processed by the shaping tree (Trafnode and
Node Remote MDM4).
4. The shaped traffic is inserted into a channel (Channel Default).
5. A label can be assigned to the shaped traffic.
6. The shaped traffic is linked to a specific Input Stream Identifier (ISI8).
7. The shaped traffic is modulated and transmitted.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 323/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Receive
1. The shaped traffic is received and demodulated on the remote site.
2. The traffic of ISI8 is inserted into the decapsulator.
3. The decapsulator filters on the specified label (when a label is specified on the transmit site).
4. The traffic is forwarded towards their destination IP addresses.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 324/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

18.2.3 Expression: ip4 dst 10.10.10.0/24

The following picture shows the L3 expression "ip4 dst net 10.10.10.0/24".
Use this expression to capture a certain IP (sub)net.

The previous figure shows that IP traffic, that belongs to specified destination subnet, is forwarded
towards the remote site.
All other traffic is dropped.
The following steps are taken:

Transmit
1. IP traffic is entering the MDM6000.
2. The traffic is inserted into the encapsulator.
3. The IP traffic is filtered according to the classification rule.
In this case "ip4 dst net 10.10.10.0/24", packets complying to this rule are further processed by the shaping
tree (Trafnode and Node Remote MDM4).
IP packets with an other destination subnet are dropped.
4. The shaped traffic is inserted into a channel (Channel Default).
5. A label can be assigned to the shaped traffic.
6. The shaped traffic is linked to a specific Input Stream Identifier (ISI8)
7. The shaped traffic is modulated and transmitted.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 325/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Receive
1. The shaped traffic is received and demodulated on the remote site.
2. The traffic of ISI8 is inserted into the decapsulator.
3. The decapsulator filters on the specified label (when a label is specified on the transmit site).
4. The traffic is forwarded towards their destination IP subnet.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 326/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

18.2.4 Expression: ip4 dst net 10.10.10.0/24 and protocol icmp

The following picture shows the L3 expression "ip4 dst net 10.10.10.0/24 and protocol icmp".
Use this expression to capture ICMP messages and enabling to prioritize those messages (used
frequently as SLA reference).

The previous figure shows that IP traffic that complies to this expression, is forwarded towards the
remote site.
All other traffic is dropped (for this classification expression).
The following steps are taken:

Transmit
1. IP traffic is entering the MDM6000.
2. The traffic is inserted into the encapsulator.
3. The IP traffic is filtered according to the classification rule.
In this case "ip4 dst net 10.10.10.0/24 and protocol icmp", packets complying to this rule are further
processed by the shaping tree (Trafnode and Node Remote MDM4).
IP packets with an other destination IP address are dropped even as the IP packets with the same IP
address but without ICMP activated.
4. The shaped traffic is inserted into a channel (Channel Default).
5. A label can be assigned to the shaped traffic
6. The shaped traffic is linked to a specific Input Stream Identifier (ISI8)
7. The shaped traffic is modulated and transmitted.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 327/367

Appendix - Classification Expressions MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Receive
1. The shaped traffic is received and demodulated on the remote site.
2. The traffic of ISI8 is inserted into the decapsulator.
3. The decapsulator filters on the specified label (when a label is specified on the transmit site).
4. The traffic is forwarded towards their destination IP addresses.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 328/367

Appendix - Generic Stream Encapsulation MDM6000 Satellite Modem

19 Appendix - Generic Stream Encapsulation

Generic Stream Encapsulation (GSE) is used in applications where bandwidth efficiency is
important, such as IP backbone or IP trunking applications over satellite.
GSE carries "native" IP content with a significant reduction in overhead compared to other
Encapsulation protocols such as MPE.
IP datagrams, Ethernet Frames, or other network layer packets, which are scheduled for
transmission, are encapsulated in one or more GSE Packets (we refer to the following figure.). The
encapsulation process delineates the start and end of each network-layer PDU (Protocol Data Unit).
It adds control information such as the network protocol type and address label, and provides an
overall integrity check when needed.

GSE guarantees that no fragmentation at the IP layer occurs. Fragmentation (if any) needed to
adapt to the DVB broadcast bearer's baseband frames is performed entirely within the GSE layer
and thus hidden from the IP layer. The reassembly process is robust against loss of baseband
frames.
The characteristics of this encapsulation mode are:
• Only supported with DVB-S2, DVB-S2X or S2 Extensions modulation.
• Possible multi-stream operation (up to 32 streams, each tagged with a separate ISI).
• Full support of VCM and FlexACM.

Refer to the DVB standard: ETSI TS 102 606 for detailed information on the Generic
Stream Encapsulation Protocol.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 329/367

Appendix - Generic Stream Encapsulation MDM6000 Satellite Modem

19.1 GSE Header

The GSE packet header is dynamic and provides different options. The minimum length of a header
is two bytes, comprising three flag fields, and a 12-bit payload length field.
The table below shows all possible fields.

Bit Offset 0 1 2-3 4-7 8-15 16-23 24-37

0 Start End Label Type GSE Length Fragment ID Total
Length
32 Total Length Protocol Type Label
(3
Byte)
64 Label (3 Byte) Label (6 Byte)
96 Label (6 Byte) ULE Extension Headers (Optional)
… ULE Extension Headers (Optional) Data
… Data

GSE Label Type

The "Label Type" bits of the GSE header carries the values of the Label Bit Field. A receiver must
interpret the label bits to see whether the PDU carries a label used for filtering purposes. When the
label is present and it does not match with the label known in the receiver, the GSE packet is
discarded.
The following possibilities are available in the GSE Encapsulator

GSE Label Type Description

No Label Broadcast mode, all receivers must process the incoming GSE
packets.

Three Bytes The receiver must perform filtering on the incoming GSE packets.
The GSE labels between the Tx site and Rx site, must match
otherwise the GSE packets are discarded.

Six Bytes Length The receiver must perform filtering on the incoming GSE packets.
The GSE labels between the Tx site and Rx site must match
otherwise the GSE packets are discarded.

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 330/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

20 Appendix - Technical Specifications

20.1 Input Interfaces

• Auto switching 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces
• Maximum rates: 380mbit/s bidirectional
(200Mbit/s for imix traffic mix, 75kpps each direction)
• Layer 2 bridge function: Ethernet over satellite
(IPv6/VLAN/MPLS compatible)
• Layer 3 static router function: IPv4 packets over satellite
• Up to 100 routes
• Advanced QoS features:
Adaptive Traffic Shaping on bitrate or symbolrate according to PIR/CIR
Flexible traffic classification on VLAN/MPLS/IPv4/IPv6
• GSE, MPE, XPE or ULE Encapsulation/Decapsulation of IP/
Ethernet frames in DVB-S2 & S2 Extensions
• Data filtering (downlink): Up to 64 receive filters

20.2 Modulation and Demodulation

SUPPORTED MODULATION SCHEMES AND FEC
• DVB-S2
Outer/Inner FEC: BCH/ LDPC MODCODs
52 MODCODs (short & normal frames):

QPSK from 1/4 to 9/10

8PSK from 3/5 to 9/10

16APSK from 2/3 to 9/10

32APSK from 3/4 to 9/10

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 331/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

• DVB-S2X (Optional)
Outer/Inner FEC: BCH/LDPC
53 MODCODs (normal frames):

QPSK from 1/4 to 9/10

8PSK from 3/5 to 9/10

16APSK from 26/45 to 9/10

32APSK from 32/45 to 9/10

64APSK from 11/15 to 5/6

128APSK 3/4; 7/9

256APSK 32/45; 3/4

13 Linear MODCODs (normal frames):

8PSK-L 5/9; 26/45

16APSK-L from 1/2 to 2/3

32APSK-L 2/3

64APSK-L 32/45

256APSK-L from 29/45 to 11/15

41 MODCODs (short frames):

QPSK from 11/45 to 8/9

8PSK from 1/2 to 2/3

16APSK from 7/15 to 8/9

32APSK from 2/3 to 8/9

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 332/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

• S2 Extensions (optional):
Outer/Inner FEC: BCH/ LDPC MODCODs:

QPSK 45/180, 60/180, 72/180, 80/180, 90/180, 100/180,

108/180, 114/180, 120/180, 126/180, 135/180,
144/180, 150/180, 160/180, 162/180

8PSK 80/180, 90/180, 100/180, 108/180, 114/180,

120/180, 126/180, 135/180, 144/180, 150/180

16APSK 80/180, 90/180, 100/180, 108/180, 114/180,

120/180, 126/180, 135/180, 144/180, 150/180,
160/180, 162/180

32APSK 100/180, 108/180, 114/180, 120/180, 126/180,

135/180, 144/180, 150/180, 160/180, 162/180

64APSK 90/180, 100/180, 108/180, 114/180, 120/180,

126/180, 135/180, 144/180, 150/180, 160/180,
162/180

• Linear MODCODs

8PSK-L 80/180, 90/180, 100/180, 108/180, 114/180,

120/180

16APSK-L 80/180, 90/180, 100/180, 108/180, 114/180,

120/180, 126/180, 135/180, 144/180, 150/180,
160/180, 162/180

64APSK-L 90/180, 100/180, 108/180, 114/180, 120/180,

126/180, 135/180, 144/180, 150/180, 160/180,
162/180

• FlexACM® controller (optional)

• FlexACM® client embedded in MDM6000 modem (optional)
• Automatic Uplink Power Control

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 333/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

BAUD RATE RANGE

Modulator 0,050 - 72 Mbaud

Class 1 Demodulator 1 - 60 Mbaud

(depending on MODCOD)

Class 2 Demodulator 256 kbaud - 72 Mbaud

FRAME LENGTH

DVB-S2 Short Frames 16200 bits for DVB-S2, and

DVB-S2X

DVB-S2 Normal Frames 64800 bits for DVB-S2, DVB-S2X

and Newtec's S2 Extensions

CLEAN CHANNEL TECHNOLOGY

• Roll-off : 5% -10% -15% -20% - 25% - 35%
• Optimum carrier spacing
• Advanced filter technology

AUTOMATED EQUALINK (TM) 3

• Non-linear pre-distortion for all MODCODs

CARRIER INTERFERENCE REDUCTION

• DVB RF Carrier ID (DVB-CID)
• Spread Spectrum Modulator (BPSK)
• Supports User Data
• Compliant to DVB Standard

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 334/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

20.3 Modulation Interfaces

L-BAND

Connector N(F), 50 Ohms

(optional SMA adapter)

Frequency 950 - 2150 MHz (10 Hz steps)

Level -35/+7 dBm (+/- 2dB)

Return loss > 14 dB

Switchable 10MHz Reference

Spurious performance
Better than - 65 dBc/4 kHz @ +5 dBm output level and > 256 kBaud
Non-signal related: < - 80 dBc @ +5 dBm output

IF-BAND (CONFIGURATION OPTION)

Connector BNC (F) - 75 ohms

(intermateable with 50 ohms)

Frequency 50 - 180 MHz (10 Hz steps)

Level -35/+10 dBm (± 2 dB)

Return loss 50 ohms: > 14 dB

75 ohms: > 20 dB

Spurious performance
Better than - 65 dBc/ 4 kHz @ +5 dBm output level and > 256 kBaud
Non-signal related:< - 80 dBc @ +5 dBm output

L-BAND MONITORING

Connector SMA (F), 50 ohms

Frequency Same as L-Band output frequency or

1050 MHz in case of IF output option
only

Level -45 dBm

Return loss > 10 dB

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 335/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

10 MHZ REFERENCE OUTPUT (OPTIONAL)

Connector BNC (F), 50 ohms

Input level +3 dBm (+/- 2 dB)

BUC POWER (OPTIONAL)

Max. current 3.8 A

Voltage 24V, 48 V (Software controlled)

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 336/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

20.4 Demodulation Interfaces

DUAL L-BAND INPUT (DEFAULT)

Connector 2 x F-type (F), 75 Ohms

Return loss > 7 dB (75 Ohm – F(F))

Maximum total input power - 10 dBm

Maximum input signal power (-30 + 10log(f))dBm where f=baud

rate in Mbaud

Minimum input signal power (-80+Es/No(thr)+10log(f))dBm where

f=baud rate in Mbaud and
Es/No(thr)= Es/No value in dB for
QEF reception

Frequency 950 - 2150 MHz

Adjacent signal < (Co+7) dBm/Hz with Co = signal level density

IF-BAND INPUT (optional, replaces one L-Band Input)

Connector BNC (F) - 75 ohms

Return loss > 15 dB

Maximum total input power + 10 dBm

Maximum input signal power (-30 + 10log(f))dBm where f=baud

rate in Mbaud

Minimum input signal power (-80+Es/No(thr)+10log(f))dBm where

f=baud rate in Mbaud and
Es/No(thr)= Es/No value in dB for
QEF reception

Frequency 50 - 180 MHz

Adjacent signal < (Co+7) dBm/Hz with Co = signal level density

LNB POWER AND CONTROL

• Max. current 350 mA (on selected IFL input)
• Voltage
11,5 -14 V (Vertical polarization)
16 -19 V (Horizontal polarization) & additional
22 kHz +/- 4 KHz (band selection according to universal LNB for Astra satellites & DiSEqC
command transmission)

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 337/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

20.5 Internal 10 MHz Reference Frequency

STANDARD STABILITY

Stability +/- 2000 ppb over 0 to 70° C

Ageing +/- 1000 ppb/year

VERY HIGH STABILITY (optional)

Stability +/- 2 ppb over 0 to 65°C

Ageing +/- 500 ppb/10year

20.6 Generic
MONITOR AND CONTROL INTERFACES
• M&C connectivity via separate Ethernet links
• Web server GUI (HTTP) via web browser
• Diagnostics report, alarm log (HTTP)
• SNMP v2c
• Modified OpenAMIP protocol to control stabilized antenna from modem

ALARM INTERFACE
• Electrical dual contact closure alarm contacts
• Connector 9-pin sub-D (F)
• Logical interface and general device alarm

20.7 Physical
• Height 1RU, width: 19”, depth 51 cm, 5.8 kg
• Power supply: 90-130 & 180-260 Vac, 105 VA, 47-63 Hz
or 36-76VDC, 160W
• Temperature:
Operational: 0°C to +50°C / +32°F to +122°F
Storage: -40° to +70°C / -40°F to +158°F
• Humidity: 5% to 85% non-condensing
• CE label and UL

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 338/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

20.8 Demodulation Performances

20.8.1 DVB-S2 Performance

20.8.1.1 DVB-S2 Performance (FER<1E-5) Normal Frames/Pilots Off

MODCOD Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No

10 Mbaud dB 36 Mbaud dB 72 Mbaud dB
QPSK 1/4 -2.79 -2.85 -2.86
QPSK 1/3 -1.51 -1.55 -1.56
QPSK 2/5 -0.47 -0.50 -0.50
QPSK 1/2 0.93 0.90 0.91
QPSK 3/5 2.19 2.15 2.15
QPSK 2/3 3.04 3.00 3.00
QPSK 3/4 4.02 3.98 3.98
QPSK 4/5 4.65 4.62 4.62
QPSK 5/6 5.17 5.13 5.13
QPSK 8/9 6.22 6.18 6.17
QPSK 9/10 6.43 6.40 6.39
8PSK 3/5 5.54 5.52 5.54
8PSK 2/3 6.54 6.48 6.49
8PSK 3/4 7.86 7.81 7.82
8PSK 5/6 9.29 9.27 9.28
8PSK 8/9 10.69 10.67 10.68
8PSK9/10 10.97 10.94 10.95
16APSK 2/3 9.00 8.97 8.99
16APSK 3/4 10.21 10.19 10.22
16APSK 4/5 11.03 11.02 11.02
16APSK 5/6 11.61 11.59 11.60
16APSK 8/9 12.93 12.92 12.92
16APSK 9/10 13.17 13.14 13.17
32APSK 3/4 12.75 12.74 12.78
32APSK 4/5 13.69 13.70 13.68
32APSK 5/6 14.26 14.30 14.27
32APSK 8/9 15.71 15.71 15.73
32APSK 9/10 16.02 16.00 16.17

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 339/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

20.8.1.2 DVB-S2 Performance (FER<1E-5) Normal Frames/Pilots On

Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No

MODCOD 10 Mbaud 36 Mbaud 72 Mbaud
dB dB dB
QPSK 1/4 -2.74 -2.80 -2.80
QPSK 1/3 -1.41 -1.46 -1.46
QPSK 2/5 -0.38 -0.42 -0.42
QPSK 1/2 1.01 0.98 0.98
QPSK 3/5 2..24 2.21 2.21
QPSK 2/3 3.09 3.05 3.06
QPSK 3/4 4.05 4.02 4.02
QPSK 4/5 4.68 4.65 4.65
QPSK 5/6 5.19 5.15 5.16
QPSK 8/9 6.24 6.21 6.20
QPSK 9/10 6.45 6.41 6.41
8PSK 3/5 5.53 5.51 5.52
8PSK 2/3 6.57 6.54 6.56
8PSK 3/4 7.90 7.88 7.88
8PSK 5/6 9.32 9.31 9.32
8PSK 8/9 10.71 10.68 10.68
8PSK9/10 10.98 10.95 10.95
16APSK 2/3 8.98 8.96 8.98
16APSK 3/4 10.25 10.25 10.26
16APSK 4/5 11.06 11.05 11.05
16APSK 5/6 11.64 11.62 11.62
16APSK 8/9 12.94 12.95 12.95
16APSK 9/10 13.19 13.17 13.17
32APSK 3/4 12.79 12.82 12.85
32APSK 4/5 13.73 13.69 13.73
32APSK 5/6 14.29 14.27 14.35
32APSK 8/9 15.73 15.70 15.72
32APSK 9/10 16.03 15.99 16.04

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 340/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

20.8.1.3 DVB-S2 Performance (FER<1E-5) Short Frames/Pilots Off

Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No

MODCOD
10 Mbaud 36 Mbaud 72 Mbaud
dB dB dB

QPSK 1/4 -3.16 -3.26 -3.19

QPSK 1/3 -1.27 -1.31 -1.29
QPSK 2/5 -0.28 -0.33 -0.31
QPSK 1/2 0.50 0.47 0.47
QPSK 3/5 2.34 2.31 2.32
QPSK 2/3 3.20 3.17 3.19
QPSK 3/4 4.15 4.13 4.14
QPSK 4/5 4.77 4.74 4.74
QPSK 5/6 5.31 5.29 5.29
QPSK 8/9 6.38 6.37 6.36
8PSK 3/5 5.75 5.75 5.80
8PSK 2/3 6.74 6.68 6.73
8PSK 3/4 8.05 8.03 8.05
8PSK 5/6 9.55 9.54 9.55
8PSK 8/9 10.88 10.88 10.88
16APSK 2/3 9.19 9.18 9.25
16APSK 3/4 10.40 10.40 10.42
16APSK 4/5 11.16 11.15 11.18
16APSK 5/6 11.84 11.86 11.88
16APSK 8/9 13.11 13.16 13.16
32APSK 3/4 13.09 13.16 13.19
32APSK 4/5 13.93 14.04 14.03
32APSK 5/6 14.58 14.69 14.70
32APSK 8/9 15.91 16.12 16.12

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 341/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

20.8.1.4 DVB-S2 Performance (FER<1E-5) Short Frames/Pilots On

Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No

MODCOD
10 Mbaud 36 Mbaud 72 Mbaud
dB dB dB

QPSK 1/4 -3.36 -3.42 -3.39

QPSK 1/3 -1.19 -1.24 -1.21
QPSK 2/5 -0.24 -0.26 -0.24
QPSK 1/2 0.56 0.52 0.52
QPSK 3/5 2.38 2.34 2.36
QPSK 2/3 3.24 3.20 3.21
QPSK 3/4 4.17 4.15 4.15
QPSK 4/5 4.77 4.75 4.75
QPSK 5/6 5.33 5.30 5.30
QPSK 8/9 6.40 6.37 6.37
8PSK 3/5 5.71 5.71 5.76
8PSK 2/3 6.77 6.74 6.77
8PSK 3/4 8.09 8.07 8.08
8PSK 5/6 9.57 9.57 9.57
8PSK 8/9 10.89 10.89 10.91
16APSK 2/3 9.16 9.15 9.21
16APSK 3/4 10.43 10.43 10.44
16APSK 4/5 11.17 11.20 11.20
16APSK 5/6 11.85 11.88 11.89
16APSK 8/9 13.13 13.18 13.18
32APSK 3/4 13.11 13.17 13.19
32APSK 4/5 13.94 14.04 14.05
32APSK 5/6 14.58 14.77 14.77
32APSK 8/9 15.93 16.15 16.14

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 342/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

20.8.2 DVB-S2X Performance

20.8.2.1 DVB-S2X Performance (FER<1E-5) Normal Frames/Pilots Off

Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No

MODCOD
10 Mbaud 36 Mbaud 72 Mbaud
dB dB dB

QPSK 1/4 -2.79 -2.85 -2.86

QPSK 1/3 -1.51 -1.55 -1.56
QPSK 2/5 -0.47 -0.50 -0.50
QPSK 1/2 0.93 0.90 0.91
QPSK 3/5 2.19 2.15 2.15
QPSK 2/3 3.04 3.00 3.00
QPSK 3/4 4.02 3.98 3.98
QPSK 4/5 4.65 4.62 4.62
QPSK 5/6 5.17 5.13 5.13
QPSK 8/9 6.22 6.18 6.17
QPSK 9/10 6.43 6.40 6.39
8PSK 3/5 5.54 5.52 5.54
8PSK 2/3 6.54 6.48 6.49
8PSK 3/4 7.86 7.81 7.82
8PSK 5/6 9.29 9.27 9.28
8PSK 8/9 10.69 10.67 10.68
8PSK9/10 10.97 10.94 10.95
16APSK 2/3 9.00 8.97 8.99
16APSK 3/4 10.21 10.19 10.22
16APSK 4/5 11.03 11.02 11.02
16APSK 5/6 11.61 11.59 11.60
16APSK 8/9 12.93 12.92 12.92
16APSK 9/10 13.17 13.14 13.17
32APSK 3/4 12.75 12.74 12.78
32APSK 4/5 13.69 13.70 13.68
32APSK 5/6 14.26 14.30 14.27
32APSK 8/9 15.71 15.71 15.73
32APSK 9/10 16.02 16.00 16.17

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 343/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No

MODCOD
10 Mbaud 36 Mbaud 72 Mbaud
dB dB dB

QPSK 13/45 -2.09 -2.14 -2.14

QPSK 9/20 0.13 0.08 0.08
QPSK 11/20 1.39 1.35 1.35
8PSK 23/36 6.19 6.15 6.16
8PSK 25/36 7.06 6.99 7.01
8PSK 13/18 7.50 7.45 7.46
16APSK 26/45 7.47 7.44 7.49
16APSK 3/5 7.95 7.92 7.93
16APSK 28/45 8.19 8.16 8.18
16APSK 23/36 8.39 8.34 8.37
16APSK 25/36 9.29 9.25 9.27
16APSK 13/18 9.78 9.71 9.72
16APSK 7/9 10.69 10.62 10.64
16APSK 77/90 12.02 11.96 11.98
32APSK 32/45 11.82 11.76 11.80
32APSK 11/15 12.22 12.16 12.19
32APSK 7/9 13.14 13.07 13.09
64APSK 11/15 15.04 14.99 15.06
64APSK 7/9 15.57 15.48 15.53
64APSK 4/5 16.00 15.91 15.94
64APSK 5/6 16.64 16.55 16.60
128APSK 3/4 19.13 19.09 19.34
128APSK 7/9 19.07 19.07 19.20
256APSK 32/45 18.84 18.76 18.85
256APSK 3/4 19.83 19.73 19.84

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 344/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No

MODCOD
10 Mbaud 36 Mbaud 72 Mbaud
dB dB dB

8APSK 5/9-L 4.69 4.65 4.66

8APSK 26/45-L 5.12 5.08 5.08
16APSK 1/2-L 5.90 5.85 5.89
16APSK 8/15-L 6.54 6.50 6.52
16APSK 5/9-L 6.80 6.77 6.79
16APSK 3/5-L 7.32 7.28 7.34
16APSK 2/3-L 8.36 8.32 8.36
32APSK 2/3-L 11.21 11.11 11.14
64APSK 32/45-L 14.02 13.97 14.02
256APSK 29/45-L 17.02 16.97 17.16
256APSK 2/3-L 17.36 17.28 17.46
256APSK 31/45-L 18.31 18.21 18.30
256APSK 11/15-L 19.06 18.96 19.09

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 345/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

20.8.2.2 DVB-S2X Performance (FER<1E-5) Normal Frames/Pilots On

Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No

MODCOD
10 Mbaud 36 Mbaud 72 Mbaud
dB dB dB

QPSK 1/4 -2.74 -2.80 -2.80

QPSK 1/3 -1.41 -1.46 -1.46
QPSK 2/5 -0.38 -0.42 -0.42
QPSK 1/2 1.01 0.98 0.98
QPSK 3/5 2.24 2.21 2.21
QPSK 2/3 3.09 3.05 3.06
QPSK 3/4 4.05 4.02 4.02
QPSK 4/5 4.68 4.65 4.65
QPSK 5/6 5.19 5.15 5.16
QPSK 8/9 6.24 6.21 6.20
QPSK 9/10 6.45 6.41 6.41
8PSK 3/5 5.53 5.51 5.52
8PSK 2/3 6.57 6.54 6.56
8PSK 3/4 7.90 7.88 7.88
8PSK 5/6 9.32 9.31 9.32
8PSK 8/9 10.71 10.68 10.68
8PSK9/10 10.98 10.95 10.95
16APSK 2/3 8.98 8.96 8.98
16APSK 3/4 10.25 10.25 10.26
16APSK 4/5 11.06 11.05 11.05
16APSK 5/6 11.64 11.62 11.62
16APSK 8/9 12.94 12.95 12.95
16APSK 9/10 13.19 13.17 13.17
32APSK 3/4 12.79 12.82 12.85
32APSK 4/5 13.73 13.69 13.73
32APSK 5/6 14.29 14.27 14.35
32APSK 8/9 15.73 15.70 15.72
32APSK 9/10 16.03 15.99 16.04

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 346/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No

MODCOD
10 Mbaud 36 Mbaud 72 Mbaud
dB dB dB

QPSK 13/45 -1.98 -2.03 -2.04

QPSK 9/20 0.23 0.20 0.20
QPSK 11/20 1.47 1.45 1.45
8PSK 23/36 6.21 6.18 6.19
8PSK 25/36 7.11 7.07 7.08
8PSK 13/18 7.58 7.54 7.55
16APSK 26/45 7.44 7.40 7.44
16APSK 3/5 7.89 7.85 7.87
16APSK 28/45 8.17 8.13 8.14
16APSK 23/36 8.39 8.34 8.37
16APSK 25/36 9.30 9.26 9.28
16APSK 13/18 9.81 9.76 9.77
16APSK 7/9 10.75 10.70 10.71
16APSK 77/90 12.11 12.05 12.06
32APSK 32/45 11.86 11.81 11.85
32APSK 11/15 12.27 12.22 12.25
32APSK 7/9 13.19 13.13 13.15
64APSK 11/15 14.97 14.91 14.96
64APSK 7/9 15.61 15.54 15.58
64APSK 4/5 16.07 15.97 16.00
64APSK 5/6 16.68 16.61 16.65
128APSK 3/4 17.96 17.90 17.97
128APSK 7/9 18.87 18.78 18.82
256APSK 32/45 18.95 18.84 18.92
256APSK 3/4 19.92 19.81 19.91

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 347/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No

MODCOD
10 Mbaud 36 Mbaud 72 Mbaud
dB dB dB

8APSK 5/9-L 4.74 4.71 4.72

8APSK 26/45-L 5.16 5.13 5.14
16APSK 1/2-L 5.93 5.91 5.94
16APSK 8/15-L 6.60 6.56 6.59
16APSK 5/9-L 6.86 6.82 6.84
16APSK 3/5-L 7.38 7.34 7.39
16APSK 2/3-L 8.41 8.36 8.40
32APSK 2/3-L 11.20 11.15 11.17
64APSK 32/45-L 14.07 14.00 14.06
256APSK 29/45-L 17.08 17.00 17.20
256APSK 2/3-L 17.40 17.32 17.51
256APSK 31/45-L 18.38 18.30 18.36
256APSK 11/15-L 19.12 19.03 19.14

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 348/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

20.8.2.3 DVB-S2X Performance (FER<1E-5) Short Frames/Pilots Off

Normal Frames and Pilots Off

Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No

MODCOD
10 Mbaud 36 Mbaud 72 Mbaud
dB dB dB

QPSK 1/4 -3.16 -3.26 -3.19

QPSK 1/3 -1.27 -1.31 -1.29
QPSK 2/5 -0.28 -0.33 -0.31
QPSK 1/2 0.50 0.47 0.47
QPSK 3/5 2.34 2.31 2.32
QPSK 2/3 3.20 3.17 3.19
QPSK 3/4 4.15 4.13 4.14
QPSK 4/5 4.77 4.74 4.74
QPSK 5/6 5.31 5.29 5.29
QPSK 8/9 6.38 6.37 6.36
8PSK 3/5 5.75 5.75 5.80
8PSK 2/3 6.74 6.68 6.73
8PSK 3/4 8.05 8.03 8.05
8PSK 5/6 9.55 9.54 9.55
8PSK 8/9 10.88 10.88 10.88
16APSK 2/3 9.19 9.18 9.25
16APSK 3/4 10.40 10.40 10.42
16APSK 4/5 11.16 11.15 11.18
16APSK 5/6 11.84 11.86 11.88
16APSK 8/9 13.11 13.16 13.16
32APSK 3/4 13.09 13.16 13.19
32APSK 4/5 13.93 14.04 14.03
32APSK 5/6 14.58 14.69 14.70
32APSK 8/9 15.91 16.12 16.12

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 349/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No

MODCOD
10 Mbaud 36 Mbaud 72 Mbaud
dB dB dB

QPSK 11/45 -2.53 -2.57 -2.58

QPSK 4/15 -2.21 -2.23 -2.23
QPSK 14/45 -1.57 -1.60 -1.59
QPSK 7/15 0.56 0.51 0.54
QPSK 8/15 1.43 1.39 1.40
QPSK 32/45 3.57 3.54 3.54
8PSK 7/15 3.92 3.92 4.06
8PSK 8/15 4.72 4.71 4.74
8PSK 26/45 5.50 5.46 5.49
8PSK 32/45 7.49 7.45 7.47
16APSK 7/15 6.85 6.88 6.97
16APSK 8/15 7.05 7.05 7.14
16APSK 26/45 7.64 7.61 7.67
16APSK 3/5 8.10 8.11 8.17
16APSK 32/45 9.80 9.72 9.73
32APSK 2/3 11.40 11.32 11.41
32APSK 32/45 12.11 12.06 12.10

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 350/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

20.8.2.4 DVB-S2X Performance (FER<1E-5) Short Frames/Pilots On

Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No

MODCOD
10 Mbaud 36 Mbaud 72 Mbaud
dB dB dB

QPSK 1/4 -3.36 -3.42 -3.39

QPSK 1/3 -1.19 -1.24 -1.21
QPSK 2/5 -0.24 -0.26 -0.24
QPSK 1/2 0.56 0.52 0.52
QPSK 3/5 2.38 2.34 2.36
QPSK 2/3 3.24 3.20 3.21
QPSK 3/4 4.17 4.15 4.15
QPSK 4/5 4.77 4.75 4.75
QPSK 5/6 5.33 5.30 5.30
QPSK 8/9 6.40 6.37 6.37
8PSK 3/5 5.71 5.71 5.76
8PSK 2/3 6.77 6.74 6.77
8PSK 3/4 8.09 8.07 8.08
8PSK 5/6 9.57 9.57 9.57
8PSK 8/9 10.89 10.89 10.91
16APSK 2/3 9.16 9.15 9.21
16APSK 3/4 10.43 10.43 10.44
16APSK 4/5 11.17 11.20 11.20
16APSK 5/6 11.85 11.88 11.89
16APSK 8/9 13.13 13.18 13.18
32APSK 3/4 13.11 13.17 13.19
32APSK 4/5 13.94 14.04 14.05
32APSK 5/6 15.58 14.77 14.77
32APSK 8/9 15.93 16.15 16.14

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 351/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No Thresh Es/No

MODCOD
10 Mbaud 36 Mbaud 72 Mbaud
dB dB dB

QPSK 11/45 -2.50 -2.54 -2.55

QPSK 4/15 -2.13 -2.16 -2.16
QPSK 14/45 -1.47 -1.50 -1.49
QPSK 7/15 0.64 0.60 0.64
QPSK 8/15 1.51 1.48 1.48
QPSK 32/45 3.65 3.62 3.62
8PSK 7/15 3.74 3.75 3.84
8PSK 8/15 - 4.66 4.65 4.67
8PSK 26/45 5.42 5.39 5.41
8PSK 32/45 7.59 7.55 7.56
16APSK 7/15 5.94 5.94 6.14
16APSK 8/15 6.90 6.89 6.95
16APSK 26/45 7.60 7.58 7.63
16APSK 3/5 8.07 8.06 8.12
16APSK 32/45 9.81 9.76 9.78
32APSK 2/3 11.38 11.36 11.44
32APSK 32/45 12.18 12.11 12.15

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 352/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

20.9 Bandwidth Cancellation Performance

Use this performance table during link budget calculations.
The numbers indicated in red show that the cancellation ratio of 30 dB is not reached.

20.9.1 Symmetrical
Degradation (dB)
Normal Frames, Pilots On
DVB-S2

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 353/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

DVB-S2X

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 354/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

20.9.2 Asymmterical
Degradation (dB)
Normal Frames, Pilots On
DVB-S2

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 355/367

Appendix - Technical Specifications MDM6000 Satellite Modem

DVB-S2X

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 356/367

Appendix - Back Panel Combinations MDM6000 Satellite Modem

21 Appendix - Back Panel Combinations

This appendix provides an overview of the possible back panel combinations for the MDM6000.
To provide the overview, the back panel is split up into two modules, this is shown in the following
figure:

21.1 Module 1

21.1.1 Demodulator Input and Modulator Output Interface

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 357/367

Appendix - Back Panel Combinations MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Ordering Options Figure

DH-03
and
OU-02

DH-03
and
OU-06

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 358/367

Appendix - Back Panel Combinations MDM6000 Satellite Modem

21.1.2 Mains Power Supply Units

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 359/367

Appendix - Back Panel Combinations MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Ordering Options Figure

PS-00

PS-01

Note: The dual PSU option PS-01 cannot be combined with OU-05 nor
OU-06!

PS-10

Note: The option PS-10 cannot be combined with OU-05 nor OU-06!

PS-11

Note: The option PS-11 cannot be combined with OU-05 nor OU-06!

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 360/367

Appendix - Back Panel Combinations MDM6000 Satellite Modem

21.2 Module 2

Module Option Figure

Default

RO-01

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 361/367

Appendix - Back Panel Combinations MDM6000 Satellite Modem

21.3 Example
The following back panel applies to a configuration with sales options:
• DH-03 and OU-02
• RO-01
• PS-00

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 362/367

Appendix - Acronyms MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 363/367

Appendix - Acronyms MDM6000 Satellite Modem

22 Appendix - Acronyms

Acronym Definition

A/B A and B connector

AC Alternating Current

ACM Adaptive Coding and Modulation

ACT Active

ADC Analog to Digital Converter

ADSL Asynchronous Digital Subscriber Line

AGC Automatic Gain Control

ALC Automatic Level Control

AM/AM Output Amplitude versus Input Amplitude

AM/PM Output Phase versus Input Amplitude

APSK Amplitude and Phase Shift Keying

ARP Address Resolution Protocol

AUPC Automatic Uplink Power Control

BBF Base Band Frame

BCH Boise Chaudhuri and Hocquengham

BER Bit Error Rate/Ratio

BNC Bayonet (Neill Concelman) Connector (for coaxial cable)

BUC Block UP Converter

C/D Carrier to Distortion Ratio

C/N Carrier to Noise Ratio

C/ND Carrier to Noise + Distortion Ratio

CCT Clean Channel Technology™

CD-ROM Compact Disc - Read Only Memory

CH-03 Chassis Version number 3

CLI Command Line Interface

CPU Central Processor Unit

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 364/367

Appendix - Acronyms MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Acronym Definition

DAC Digital to Analog Converter

DC Direct Current

DC-BUC Direct Current - Block-up Converter

DTH Direct To Home

DVB Digital Video Broadcasting

DVB-CID Digital Video Broadcasting - Carrier Identification

DVB-S Digital Video Broadcasting - Satellite

DVB-S2 Digital Video Broadcasting - Satellite - version 2

EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility

EN English

ESC Escape

ETSI European Telecommunication Standards Institute

EU European Union

EXT External

FCC Federal Communications Commission

FEC Forward Error Correction

FGM Fixed Gain Mode

FIFO First In First Out

FTP File Transfer Protocol

GND Grounding

GPRS General Packet Radio Service

GSE Generic Stream Encapsulation

GUI Graphical User Interface

ICMP4 Internet Control Message Protocol

IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol

ID Identifier

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IF Intermediate Frequency

IFL Inter Facility Link

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 365/367

Appendix - Acronyms MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Acronym Definition

IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol  

IP Internet Protocol

ISI Input Stream Identifier

L-BAND Low-Band

LCD Liguid Crystal Display

LED Light Emitting Diode

LME Link Margin Estimator

LNB Low Noise Block Converter

MAC Medium Access Control

MDM Modem

MEM Memory

MGMT Management

MIB Management Information Base

MODCOD Modulation and Coding

NMS Network Management System

NTP Network Time Protocol

NV Naamloze Vennootschap

OK All Correct

OOB Out Of Band

PC Personal Computer

PEB Power Equivalent Bandwidth

PER Packet Error Rate

PIR Peak Information Rate

PL Physical Layer

PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence

PSU Power Supply

QEF Quasi Error Free

QoS Quality of Service

QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 366/367

Appendix - Acronyms MDM6000 Satellite Modem

Acronym Definition

REACH Registration Evaluation and Authorization of Chemicals

REF Reference

RF Radio Frequency

RFI Radio Frequency Interference

RH Relative Humidity

RMCP Remote Monitor and Control Protocol

RO Roll-Off

RS Recommended Standard

RX Receive

SMA SubMiniature version A

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SSH Secure Shell

SVHC Substances of Very High Concern

TCP Transmission Control Protocol

TOS Type of Service

TX Transmit

UDP User Datagram Protocol

USB Universal Serial Buss

USS Universal Switch System

UTC Universal Coordinated Time (replaced GMT)

VA Volt Ampere

VSAT Very Small Aperture Terminal

WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment

XML Extensible Markup Language

Newtec Proprietary V1.0

Confidentiality: Unrestricted 367/367

 Get More Out of Your Equipment
The understanding of your application in combination with our product leads to reliable
and cost-efficient solutions.
Visit: www.newtec.eu/applications for our full application range.

Feedback on this document?

Please provide any comment, error found or suggestion for
improvement, you may have about this document to
[email protected]

Twitter.com/Newtec_Satcom

Linkedin.com/company/newtec

Youtube.com/NewtecSatcom

Slideshare.net/newtec_satcom

Visit our website: www.newtec.eu